nemo outdoor 5.80 manual

Air Interface Measurement Tool

Version 5.80.00

User Manual

© 2011 by Anite Finland Ltd. All rights reserved.

This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may only be used

or copied in accordance with the terms of such license. The information in this manual is intended for

informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Anite Finland Ltd assumes no

responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this user manual.

Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in

any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Anite Finland Ltd.

Windows®, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Outlook®, and Internet Explorer are

registered trademarks of the Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries.

MapInfo® and MapX® are registered trademarks of MapInfo® Corporation. CDMA 2000® is a

registered trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA -USA). The license

management portion of this Licensed Technology is based on SentinelLM* © 1989-2003 Rainbow

Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.

Revision 5.80.00, Last edited April 2011

CONTENTS 3

CONTENTS

QUICK GUIDE 10 SETTING UP THE SYSTEM 10

VOICE MEASUREMENTS 11

CS DATA MEASUREMENTS 11

PS DATA MEASUREMENTS 12

USING NEMO OUTDOOR 13

Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options 13

BEFORE YOU BEGIN 15 COPY PROTECTION 23

Technical Support Expiration 26

IMPORTANT 27

End-User License Agreement 27

Traffic Safety 27

Operating Environment 27

NOTES 28

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW 29 VOICE TESTING 29

CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING 30

PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING 30

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI 32

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE 33

INDOOR MEASUREMENTS 34

INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM35 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 35

OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 35

NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 37

NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP 37

Connecting SAGEM OT 260/268 Mobile 37

Connecting a GPS Receiver 38

Connecting a Scanner 39

Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device 39

Connecting Voice Quality Devices 40

GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING 41

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS 42 CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR 42

Configuration through Welcome page 42

Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog 45

Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually 47

4 Nemo O utdoor User Ma nual

Use Case 1. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup 48

CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES 50

CONFIGURATION MANAGER VIEW 51

Handler Information 52

User Interface 53

Notifications 60

Scripts 64

Device Configurations 65

Devices 66

MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES 72

Measurement Properties – General 72

Measurement Properties – Measurement Settings 74

Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Mobiles 75

Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Mobiles 77

Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Scanners 79

Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Scanners 86

Measurement Properties – Spectrum Scanning 98

Measurement Properties - Script 101

MEASUREMENT MODES 102 CALL MODE MEASUREMENT 102

FREQUENCY SCANNING MEASUREMENTS IN GSM 102

Scanning with a Mobile 102

Scanning with a Fast Frequency Scanner 102

SCANNING MODE MEASUREMENT IN UMTS 103

Frequency Scan Mode 103

Pilot Mode 103

SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 103

DURING MEASUREMENTS 104 MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS 105

With a Scanner 105

With a Mobile 105

MAKING VOICE CALLS 105

Voice Call Properties 106

Voice Call Properties – TETRA 108

VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS 109

MAKING VIDEO CALLS 111

DATA TRANSFERS 114

Configuring the Data Connection 114

Configuring the FTP Protocol 120

Configuring the SFTP Protocol 123

Configuring the HTTP Protocol 125

Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol 127

Configuring the POP3 Protocol 129

Configuring the SMTP Protocol 131

Configuring the WAP Protocol 135

CONTENTS 5

Configuring the Streaming Protocol 136

Configuring the Trace Route Protocol 138

Making Data Transfers 139

STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING 140

VOIP CALLS 141

SMS TESTING 143

SMS Testing with CDMA terminals 144

MMS TESTING 145

Packet Session Settings for MMS 146

MMS Editor 147

Making MMS Measurements 148

MMS Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80 148

MMS Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 151

START EXTERNAL APPLICATION 154

ICMP PING 155

IP PACKET CAPTURING 157

MAKING SCRIPT FILES 162

Script Transfer Stop Commands 164

Add Menu 167

Wait Settings 168

Advanced 171

Running Scripts 175

MEASUREMENT LISTS 176

FORCING FUNCTIONS 178

Channel Locking 178

Band Locking 180

Handover Control 181

Cell Barring 186

CELL TESTING 186

MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION 188

Missing neighbor detection with a mobile 188

Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile 190

PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS 191

UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone 192

UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements 194

CDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis - Mobile Phones 194

CDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis - Scanners 195

GSM Interference Analysis 195

TIMESLOT TESTING 198

VIEWING GRAPHS 200

Graph Popup Menu 201

Zoom - Scatter Graph 204

Graph Side Panel - Layers 206

Graph Side Panel – Values & Parameter 214

Graph Layer Color Configuration 216

VIEWING GRIDS 222


Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message 223

Grid Popup Menu 223

VIEWING MAPS 250

Map Side Panel 252

Route Plans 254

Map Popup Menu 259

Color Set Editor 278

Map Example 1 280

Map Example 2 281

Map Example 3 282

Map Example 4 283

Map Example 5 284

VIEWING FLOORPLANS 286

Multiple Routes and Floorplans 287

Indoor Route Planning 288

Indoor Map Popup Menu 290

ENDING MEASUREMENTS 298 MEASUREMENT REPORT 299

MEASUREMENT RESULTS 301 ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS 301

PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES 301

Selecting Playback Files 301

During Playback 302

Viewing and Moving Markers 303

Closing Playback Files 304

UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO AN FTP SERVER304

USER INTERFACE 307 VIEW GROUPS 307

MENU BAR 308

TOOLBAR 308

STATUS BAR 308

NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS 309

File Menu 309

Edit Menu 310

View Menu 310

Measurement Menu 311

Playback Menu 313

Data Menu 313

Window Menu 315

Help Menu 315

CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS 316

NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS 320

Custom Windows 321

Parameter Tree Search Functionality 322

Device Info Window for Mobiles 322

CONTENTS 7

Device Info Window for Scanners 324

Output Window 324

Script Status Window 325

Controlling Windows 325

HOW TO READ MIMO PARAMETERS IN BAR GRAPH DATA VIEW 326

TROUBLESHOOTING 327 LOW THROUGHPUT 327

All Windows Versions 328

Windows XP 329

Windows Vista/Windows7 329

DEVICE INFO WINDOW 331

CANNOT ADD DEVICES 331

CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS 331

PROBLEMS WITH GPS RECEIVERS 332

MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION 332

NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS 333 TOOLBAR BUTTONS 333

DIALOG BUTTONS 334

GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS 335

MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS 336

SHORTCUT KEYS 339

NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS 340

NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT 343 INTERNET SUPPORT 343

USER CLUB 343

PHONE, EMAIL, AND FAX SUPPORT 343

APPENDIX 1 345 INSTALLING A PCMCIA SERIAL I/O CARD 345

APPENDIX 2 346 CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER TO A PCMCIA SOCKET347

APPENDIX 3 348 MAKING MAPINFO® RASTER MAPS 348

Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo® SW 348

APPENDIX 4 350 CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR350

APPENDIX 5 354 NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI CONFIGURATION 354

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI SYSTEM COMPONENTS 355

Common Components 355


Optional components 359

MMAC3 WITH CASE 360

Lid 360

Carrying case 362

MMAC3 WITHOUT CASE 363

IN-VEHICLE SETUP & INSTALLATION 367

Without Carrying Case 367

With Carrying Case 369

APPENDIX 6 375 NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE MANUAL 375

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Technical Specifications 375

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite System Components 378

Setting Up the System 382

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite vs. Nemo Outdoor Multi 388

APPENDIX 7 - VOICE QUALITY GUIDE 389 VOICE QUALITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 392

Mobile-to-Fixed Line 392

Mobile-to-Mobile 393

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – NEMO AUDIO MODULE (EVOQ) 393

Terminal-Specific Hardware for Voice Quality Testing 393

Disassembling the EVOQ Module 414

Assembling the EVOQ Module 415

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – TERRATEC SOUND CARD 415

Nemo Voice Quality – TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Technical Data 415

Installing the DMX 6Fire USB Driver in Windows XP 416

Required Hardware with TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card 423

TERRATEC DMX 6FIRE SOUND CARD WITH NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI 433

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – MAYA44 USB SOUND CARD 434

Technical Specifications 434

Installing the Maya44 USB Connectivity Driver 436

MAYA44 SOUND CARD WITH TERRATEC DMX SOUND CARD AND NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI 439

MAKING VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS 441

Mobile-to-Mobile VQ Measurements 441

Mobile-to-Fixed-to-Mobile VQ Measurements 447

APPENDIX 8 - SCANNER USER GUIDE453 CONNECTING DEVICES 453

Connecting Nemo FSR1 Scanner 453

Connecting Anritsu Scanners 456

Connecting the DRT Wimax 4301A+ Scanner 466

Connecting the PCTEL LX CDMA/EVDO/GSM/WCDMA Scanner 468

Connecting PCTEL EX scanners 470

Connecting the PCTEL LX GSM/WCDMA Dual-Mode Scanner 474

Connecting the PCTEL MX GSM/WCDMA Scanner 477

Connecting PCTEL PCT Scanners 479

CONTENTS 9

Connecting the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ/TSML Scanner482

Connecting the Rohde & Schwarz TSMW Scanner 486

STARTING DEVICES 490

Starting Nemo FSR1 Scanner 490

Starting Anritsu Scanners 491

Starting DRT Scanners 493

Starting PCTEL Scanners 494

Starting Rohde & Schwarz Scanners 500

STARTING MEASUREMENT 501

Nemo FSR1 Scanner 501

Anritsu Scanners 505

PCTEL Scanners 517

DRT Scanners 537

Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ/TSML/TSMW Scanner 541

TROUBLESHOOTING 551

APPENDIX 9 - TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES 552 PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA 552

UAC Settings 552

Antivirus Filtering 552

Low Data Throughputs 553

APPENDIX 10 557 END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT 557


QUICK GUIDE

This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and how to

start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed explanations on using

Nemo Outdoor.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM

From Nemo Outdoor 5.8 onwards the software is protected with a copy protection module and it

is not possible to install Nemo Outdoor without it. Software-based copy protection licenses are

no longer valid.

1. Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (p.34). Run

the Nemo Outdoor installation program Nemo Outdoor 5.xx.xx.exe from the Nemo Outdoor CD-

ROM. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are installed in the same setup.

2. During the installation, Nemo Outdoor will ask you to insert the copy protection module on the

computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor (p.23). Please insert the copy protection

module and wait until Windows has completed installing the device drivers. Press OK to continue

the setup.

3. When the installation is finished, restart the computer.

4. The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the computer’s COM

and/or USB ports. If you are using a laptop, you will probably need a PCMCIA card or a USB

serial converter to create additional COM ports. Install the PCMCIA card or USB serial converter

and the required driver (p.345). Connect the devices to the COM ports with the specified cables

and switch the devices on. Especially with GPRS mobiles that have two cables, be sure to use the

correct cable.

5. If you are making a data measurement, you need to create a dial-up connection. Follow the

instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide provided in the Nemo Outdoor package to set

up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.

Choose one of the following steps:

Select step 5 if you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor. Go to step 6 if you are an older user of Nemo Outdoor and would like to use the Load Device Configuration dialog. Go to step 7 if you would like to set up the system manually.

6. On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed

measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open a Device Configuration tool

you can select saved device configurations, and start the devices in online mode, or decide to

work offline first and connect and start them later by clicking the work offline button in Nemo

Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic device detection functionality in the Create New Device

Configuration tool automatically detects devices connected to the computer and assigns the

appropriate, previously created COM port and dial-up information to them.

7. To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open a Device

Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see p.45).

QUICK G UIDE 11

8. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a premade

device configuration and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration

file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If you prefer setting up the

measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and starting the measurement

devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. You can

change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device later. When

you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the

work offline button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

9. If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device

Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and

select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File |

Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online of offline mode. Alternatively, you

can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements.

You can also do this from the configuration manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). In addition, you can

also use the Autodetect devices functionality by going to Measurement | Autodetect Devices,

which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up

connection.

10. Open the Configuration Manager dialog (Ctrl+M) (p.51) to add measurement devices manually.

Select the Device item and click the Add button . Select the device type (phone, scanner, GPS)

that you want to add and select the device model from the list. Click Next. In the Device Properties

dialog, select the correct COM ports and click OK.

11. If you are using a GPS receiver, you will also need a map. Use the Windows® Explorer to copy all

the required map files to the maps folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\maps. Define the default

map file and map folder as follows: open the Configuration Manager dialog, double-click the User

Interface item and select the Paths tab. In the Map field, browse the folder where map files are

stored. In the Default map field, browse the default map file (p.57).

12. If you have base station files (.nbf), copy them to the BTS files folder, for example, C:\Nemo

Tools\BTS files. When you want to view a BTS file on a map, open the Measurement Properties

dialog for the measurement mobile used, and browse a file in the BTS File field. Click OK. Open a

map through the Data menu and the BTS icons should appear on the map.

VOICE MEASUREMENTS

Setting up voice measurements:

1. Configure the measurement device in the Phone Properties dialog (p.67). Define the Trace Port.

2. Go to the Measurement Properties dialog.

3. Click OK. You can now start voice measurements.

CS DATA MEASUREMENTS

A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up

server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific.

Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection

and to configure the measurement mobile.


Setting up CS data measurements:

1. Configure the measurement device in the Phone Properties dialog (p.67). Define the Trace and

Modem Ports and select a Circuit Switched Dial-Up Connection.

2. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog (p.72), click the Properties buttons next

to the Data Number field to define Data Call Properties (p.132).

3. Select the Data Protocol. Depending on you selection, the Properties button will either open the

TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf) (p. 117), FTP Transfer Properties (p.121), SFTP

Transfer Properties (p. 124), HTTP Transfer Properties (p.126), E-Mail Settings (p.130), WAP

Transfer Properties, or Streaming Properties (p.137) dialog.

4. To set up ICMP Ping measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data

measurements), double-click the ICMP Ping field and define the Ping Settings (p.155).

5. To set up SMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements),

double-click the Short Messaging Service field and define the SMS Testing Settings (p.143).

6. To set up MMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements),

double-click the Multimedia Messaging Service field and define the MMS Settings (p.145).

7. Click OK. You can now start CS data measurements.

PS DATA MEASUREMENTS

Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection

and to configure the measurement mobile.

Setting up PS data measurements:

1. Configure the measurement device in the Phone Properties dialog (p.67). Define the Trace and

Modem Ports and select a Packet Switched Dial-Up Connection.

2. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog (p.72), click the PDP Context Properties

button. Define PDP Context Settings to establish a data connection (p.116).

3. Select the Data Protocol. Depending on you selection, the Properties button will either open the

TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf) (p. 117), FTP Transfer Properties (p.121), SFTP

Transfer Properties (p. 124), HTTP Transfer Properties (p.126), E-Mail Settings (p.130),

Streaming Properties (p.137) dialog.

4. To set up ICMP Ping measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data

measurements), double-click the ICMP Ping field and define the Ping Settings (p. 155).

5. To set up Trace route measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data

measurements), double-click the Trace Route field and define the Trace Route Properties (p.

139).

6. To set up SMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements),

double-click the Short Messaging Service field and define the SMS Settings (p. 143).

7. To set up MMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements),

double-click the Multimedia Messaging Service field and define the MMS Settings (p. 145).

8. Click OK. You can now start PS data measurements.

QUICK G UIDE 13

USING NEMO OUTDOOR

When a green light is blinking in the Device Info window, the device is connected properly and is ready

for measurements.

1. First, open some measurement windows through the Data menu for monitoring the measurement.

Organize the windows by selecting Windows menu | Tile Horizontally / Tile Vertically.

2. Select Data menu | Map| New. Select a map file and click OK to open the map. Use the Pan tool

to position the map. The buttons will zoom in and zoom out respectively. First, click on

the button to activate the tool and then on the map.

3. Click the Expand Device Info Window button in the Device Info window to display some

device related parameters (p.322).

4. With mobiles, you can use Scripts (p.140) to generate a sequence of actions that Nemo Outdoor

will execute automatically. Click the Device Settings button in the Device Info window and

select Script Properties. Select an existing script in the Script File field or create a new one by

clicking the Script Editor button.

5. If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement, use the Notifications

function (p. 60). Click the Configure Notifications button in the Device Info window to access

the Notifications dialog.

6. Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button . Nemo Outdoor will start the recording

automatically. To stop running the script, click the button again. To finish both the recording and

the script, click the Stop button .

7. To perform measurements manually, select the appropriate actions, such as, start voice call or

send MMS message, from the Device Commands menu.

8. Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button . Nemo Outdoor has recorded a measurement

file of the performed test calls/scan on the computer’s hard disk. You can playback the

measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report dialog. Click the Rename button

to change the file name.

9. Click the Start Playback button to playback a file. During playback use the Pause button to

freeze the playback and observe the different measurement windows for that particular point in

time. You can also open and close windows during the playback (p.301).

Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options

Outdoor supports the following command-line options. These command lines will enable the user to

enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. You can enter the command lines either with Command

Prompt through Start | Run | cmd, or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor on the desktop and

enter the command line to the shortcut’s Properties | Shortcut |Target field.

/W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor

/H <hw config> will directly open the given hardware configuration in Nemo Outdoor

/M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode, in which the user is not able to save any

changes made to the hardware configuration or workspace.

Hence, the following command line

Outdoor5 /W test.wor /H N95.hwc /M SIMPLE


will start Nemo Outdoor, load the test.wor workspace, N95.hwc hardware configuration, and prevent

any changes possibly made to them from taking effect.

BEFORE YOU BEGI N 15

BEFORE YOU BEGIN

This manual explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface Measurement Tool

Software for Windows® XP Professional and Windows® 7 developed by Anite Finland Ltd.

Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of digital

networks. The supported network standards are:

cdmaOne 450, 800,1900 MHz

CDMA2000

1xEV-DO

AMPS

DVB-H

EGPRS

GSM 850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz

GPRS

HSDPA

HSUPA

HSPA+

LTE FDD bands

TD-SCDMA

TETRA

UMTS (FDD mode)

WiMAX

Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks. Nemo Outdoor collects measurement

results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and stores them on a hard

disk. Measurement results provide useful information for network optimization, verification, and

maintenance purposes. Results can be efficiently and easily viewed with the Nemo analysis tool Nemo

Analyze for Windows®.

Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers. The supported measurement

device models are (for a complete list of supported devices, see the Nemo Outdoor product

description):

GSM Mobiles

Nokia N85 GSM EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

GSM Scanners

PCTEL LX GSM All GSM frequencies

PCTEL LX GSM/UMTS GSM 900/1800, UMTS 2100, GSM/UMTS 850/1900

PCTEL PCT-510 GSM 850/900/1800/1900

PCTEL PCT-520 GSM 900/1800, UMTS 2100

Anritsu ML8720C GSM 900/1800, UMTS 2100

Anritsu ML8740A GSM 900/1800, UMTS 2100

Anritsu ML8740B GSM 900/1800, UMTS 2100


TETRA Mobiles

Terminal TX RX Direct Mode

THR 850 (Nokia)

380 - 390 MHz 390 - 400 MHz

410 - 420 MHz 420 - 430 MHz

806 - 824 MHz 851 - 869 MHz

THR 880

380-390 MHz 390-400 MHz 380-400 MHz

806-824 MHz 851-870 MHz 806-825 MHz, 851-870

MHz

THR 880i

350-360 MHz 360-370 MHz 350-370 MHz

380-390 MHz 390-400 MHz 380-400 MHz

380-390/410-420 MHz 390-400/420-430 MHz 380-400/410-430 MHz

410-420 MHz 420-430 MHz 410-430 MHz

450-460 MHz 460-470 MHz 450-470 MHz

806-825 MHz 851-870 MHz 806-825 MHz

851-870 MHz

THR880i Ex

380-390 MHz 390-400 MHz 380-400 MHz

410-420 MHz 420-430 MHz 410-430 MHz

806-825 MHz 851-870 MHz 806-825 MHz

851-870 MHz

THR880i Lite

380-390 MHz 390-400 MHz 380-400 MHz

806-825 MHz 851-870 MHz 806-825 MHz

851-870 MHz

EGPRS Mobiles

Nokia 6230i EGSM/GPRS/EGPRS 900/1800/1900, PoC

Nokia 3500 Quad band EGSM 900, GSM 850/1800/1900

1xEVDO & CDMA2000 Mobiles

GTRAN GPC-6420 CDMA 450

data card

LG LHD-200E CDMA 450

Motorola V3C CDMA 800/1900, AMPS 800 (CDMA2000® 1X compliant)

LG C270 CDMA 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant)

LG KX206 CDMA 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant)



LG VX8000 CDMA 800/1900, AMPS 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant)




LG VX8350 CDMA 800/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant, Rev. A)

LG VX8360 CDMA 850/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant, Rel. 0)

Kyocera KPC650 data card CDMA 850/1900, AMPS 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant)

UTStarcom/

Audiovox PC5740 data card CDMA 800/1900, AMPS 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant)

Zapp Telemodem Z020 CDMA 450 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant)

Pantech PX-500 PCMCIA CDMA 800/1900

Novatel Wireless Ovation CDMA 800/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant, Rev. A)

MC727

Novatel Wireless Ovation CDMA 850/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant, Rev. A)

MC760

Huawei EC169 CDMA 800/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant, Rev. A)

Huawei C7600 CDMA 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant, Rev. A)

Sierra Wireless 597 CDMA 800/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant, Rev. A)

Huawei EC367 CDMA 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant, Rev. B)

1XEV-DO Scanners

PCTEL LX 1XEV-DO 450



PCTEL LX CDMA 850/1900, EV-DO 850/1900

PCTEL LX CDMA/EV-DO 850

PCTEL EX CDMA/EV-DO 850/1900

UMTS Mobiles

Nokia 6630 UMTS 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800

Nokia 6680 UMTS 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800

Nokia 7376 UMTS band IV 1700UL/ 2100 DL, GSM/EDGE 850/1800/1900

Nokia N80 UMTS 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800/1900

Nokia N92 UMTS 2100, GSM/EDGE 900/1800/1900

Motorola V3X UMTS 2100, GSM 900/1800

Samsung SGH-Z105 UMTS 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800




Samsung ZV10 UMTS 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800

Samsung P920 UMTS 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800

Samsung SGH-T639 UMTS 2100 AWS, GSM 850/900/1800/1900

(T-Mobile)

Qualcomm TM 6250 UMTS 1900, GSM/GPRS 850/1900 OR

UMTS 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800

Vodafone 3G data card UMTS 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800

Merlin U530 data card UMTS 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800


UMTS Scanners

PCTEL LX UMTS 850

PCTEL EX UMTS 850/1900, GSM 850/1900

PCTEL EX UMTS 2100 AWS, GSM 850/1900

PCTEL EX UMTS 900/2100, GSM 900/1800

PCTEL EX UMTS 2100 AWS, GSM 1900

PCTEL EX UMTS 2100/GSM 900/1800

PCTEL EX Mini 06110 UMTS 2100

PCTEL EX Mini 06111 UMTS 900/2100

PCTEL EX Mini 06112 UMTS 850/1900

PCTEL EX Mini 06113 UMTS AWS

PCTEL LX UMTS 900

PCTEL LX UMTS UMTS 1900 or UMTS 2100

PCTEL LX GSM/UMTS UMTS 2100, GSM 900/1800

PCTEL LX UMTS UMTS/ GSM 850/1900

PCTEL LX UMTS UMTS 850/1900/2100/2100 (AWS)

PCTEL PCT-505 UMTS UMTS 850/900/1800/1900/2100

PCTEL PCT-520 GSM/UMTS UMTS 2100, GSM 900/1800

PCTEL MX GSM/UMTS UMTS 850/900/1800/1900/2100/2100 (AWS), GSM

850/900/1800/1900

Anritsu ML8720B UMTS 2100

Anritsu ML8720C UMTS 2100, Dual-mode GSM 900/1800

Anritsu ML8740A UMTS 2100, Dual-mode GSM 900/1800

Anritsu ML8740B UMTS 2100, Dual-mode GSM 900/1800

Nemo FSR1 Scanner GSM 850/900/1800/1900MHz

UMTS 850/900/1900/2100/2100AWS

CDMA/EVDO 850/1900

LTE 700- A/ B/ C/ D, 850, 900, 1800, 1900, 2100, 2100 AWS and 2600

(E-UTRA bands 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 12, 13, 14 and 17)


Rohde & Schwarz Scanners

TSML-C CDMA/EV-DO, spectrum analyzer, CW scanning

TSML-G GSM, spectrum analyzer, CW scanning

TSML-W UMTS, spectrum analyzer, CW scanning

TSML-GW UMTS 850/900/1900/2100/2100 AWS, spectrum analyzer, CW scanning,

GSM-E/-R 850/900/1800/1900

TSMQ GSM 850/900/1800/1900,

WCDMA 850/900/1900/2100/2100AWS

CDMA/EVDO 450/800/1900

Spectrum analyzer, CW scanning

TSMW GSM 850/900/1900/1900,

CDMA2000, EVDO 450/800/1900

WCDMA 850/900/1900/2100/2100AWS

LTE FDD bands 700, E800, 850, 900, 1800, 1900, 2100, 2100 AWS and

2600 (E-UTRA bands 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 17, 20)

All LTE TDD bands

(E-UTRA bands 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40),

spectrum analyzer

HSDPA Mobiles

Qualcomm TM 6275/6280 UMTS/HSDPA 1900, GSM/GPRS 850/900/1900 OR

UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM/GPRS 850/900/1800

Merlin U740 data card UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800

Merlin U870 data card UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM/GPRS 850/900/1800

Merlin X950 D Express UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100, GSM 850/900/1800/1900

data card

Motorola RAZR2 V9 UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Motorola RAZR2 V9US UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900, GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia C5-03 UMTS/HSPA 900/1900/2100, EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia N85 UMTS/HSDPA 900/1900/2100, EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia N85US UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100, EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia N95 UMTS/HSDPA 2100, EGSM900, GPRS/EGPRS 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia N95US UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900, EGSM900, GPRS/EGPRS 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia N96 UMTS/HSDPA 900/2100, EGSM900, GPRS/EGPRS 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia N96US UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900, EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia N97 UMTS/HSDPA 900/1900/2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia N97US UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100, Quad band GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia 6120 UMTS/HSDPA 850/2100, EGSM 900, GPRS/EGPRS 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia 6121 UMTS/HSDPA 900/2100, EGSM 900, GPRS/EGPRS 850/900/1800/1900

LG TU550 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/1800/1900

Sierra Wireless AirCard 850 UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM/GPRS 900/1800

data card

Sierra Wireless AirCard 860 UMTS/HSDPA 1900, GSM/GPRS 850/1900

data card

Samsung Omnia 7 UMTS/HSPA 900/2100 MHz, EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Samsung Focus UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100 MHz, EGSM/GPRS/EDGE

850/900/1800/1900

Samsung Z560 UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 900/1800/1900

Samsung ZX20 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900


Samsung Z720 UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 900/1800/1900

Samsung A 707 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900, GSM/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Samsung G800 UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM 900/1800/1900

Samsung SGH-U800 Soul UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM 900/1800/1900

Option GlobeTrotter 3G+ UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM 850/900/1800/1900

data card

Option Globetrotter GT UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM 900/1800/1900

MAX E data card

Option GlobeTrotter GT UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

MAX 7.2 Ready data card

Option Globetrotter HSDPA UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

7.2 Ready data card UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100, GSM/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Option Globetrotter

EXPRESS 7.2 data card UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100, GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Huawei E169 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100, GSM 850/900/1800/1900

HSUPA Mobiles

Huawei E180 UMTS/HSPA 900/2100, GSM/EGPRS

Huawei E270 USB modem UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100, GSM/EGPRS

Huawei E870 Express UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100, GSM/EGPRS

data card

Icera Espresso 300D UMTS/HSPA 850/2100AWS/1900/2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE

850/900/1800/1900

Novatel Ovation MC930D UMTS/HSPA 2100, GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

USB modem

Novatel Ovation MC990D UMTS/HSPA 900/1900/2100, GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

USB modem

Qualcomm MSM7200TM UMTS/HSPA 850/900/1700/1900/2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE

850/900/1800/1900

Option Globetrotter HSUPA UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100, GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Option iCON 452 UMTS/HSPA Quad band 850/AWS/1900/2100

Sierra Wireless AirCard 880 UMTS/HSPA 850/2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Sierra Wireless AirCard 881 UMTS/HSPA 850/1900, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Sierra Wireless AirCard UMTS/HSPA 850/1900, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

885 Compass

Sierra Wireless Compass UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia 6720(RM-424) UMTS/HSPA 900/1900/2100, GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia 6720US (RM-564) UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100, GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Nokia C5 (RM-645) UMTS/HSPA 900/2100, GSM 850/900/1800/1900

HSPA+ Mobiles

Huawei E182E UMTS/HSPA+ 900/2100, Quad-band EDGE/GPRS

850/900/1800/1900

Huawei E270+ UMTS/HSPA+ 2100/1900/900/850, GSM/GPRS/EDGE

850/900/1800/1900

Huawei E1820 UMTS/HSPA+ 2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 Novatel Ovation MC545 HSPA+/HSPA/UMTS - 900/1900/2100 MHz, Quad-band GPRS/EDGE -

850/900/1800/1900 MHz Novatel Ovation MC996D UMTS/HSPA+ 900/2100, Quad-band EDGE/GPRS 850/900/1800/1900


Novatel Ovation MC998D UMTS/HSPA+ 850/1900/2100, Quad-band EDGE/GPRS

850/900/1800/1900

Sierra Wireless 306 UMTS/HSPA+ 850/1900/2100, Quad-band GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Sierra Wireless 307 UMTS/HSPA+ 900/2100, Quad band GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Sierra Wireless 308 UMTS/HSPA+ 850/1900/2100, Quad-band GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Sierra Wireless 309 UMTS/HSPA+ 900/2100, Quad band GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Sierra Wireless 310U UMTS/HSPA+ 900/1900/2100 Quad band GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Sierra Wireless 312U UMTS/HSPA+ 850/1900/2100, Quad-band GSM 850/900/1800/1900

Bandrich Bandluxe C320 UMTS/HSPA+ 850/900/1900/2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE

850/900/1800/1900

Qualcomm MD8220 UMTS/HSPA+ 850/900/1900/2100, GSM/GPRS/EDGE

850/900/1800/1900

TD-SCDMA Mobiles

Datang DTM8101 TD-SCDMA 2000

Datang DTM 8120 GSM 900/1800, TD-SCDMA 2000

Leadcore LC8130E TD-SCDMA 2000, HSDPA/GSM/EGPRS 900/1800

TD-SCDMA Scanners

PCTEL EX GSM 900/1800 TD-SCDMA 2000

UMA Mobiles

Nokia 6136 GSM 850/900/1800/1900, WLAN 802.11b/g 2.4GHz for UMA

DVB-H Mobiles

Nokia N92 DVB-H 470-702 MHz, UMTS 2100, GSM/EDGE 900/1800/1900

Samsung P920 DVB-H 470-702 MHz, UMTS 2100, GSM 900/1800/1900

Samsung P940 DVB-H 470-702 MHz, UMTS 2100, GSM/EDGE 900/1800/1900

LG U800 DVB-H 470-702 MHz, UMTS 2100, GSM 900/1800/1900

LG KU950 DVB-H 470-702 MHz, UMTS/HSDPA 2100, GSM 900/1800/1900

Anritsu MS 2721B+ DVB-H 474-850 MHz

DVB-H Analyzer

WiMAX Mobiles

Zyxel MAX-100 2.500-2.700GHz

Motorola PCCW200 2.X-3.X GHz

Motorola USBw 25100 2.496 – 2.690 GHz

Beceem BCS 200 2.X-3.X GHz

Beceem BCSM250


WiMAX Scanners

PCTEL EX 2.496-2.69 GHz

DRT 4301A+ 2300-2360 MHz, 2496-2690 MHz, 3300-3800 MHz, 5150-5825 MHz

ZTE TU25 WiMax 2.496 GHz-2.690 GHz

USB modem

LTE Scanners

PCTEL EX LTE Single Band Upper 700C

LTE Dual Band Upper 700-C/AWS 2100 MHz Mini

LTE Dual Band Lower 700-B/C/AWS 2100MHz Mini

LTE Single Band Lower 700MHz-A/B/C Mini

LTE Tri-Band Scanner, Lower 700-A/B/C / Upper 700-C / 2100 AWS

LTE Single Band 1600 (E-UTRA band 24)

LTE Dual band 1800/2600 MHz

LTE Single Band 2100 MHz

LTE Single Band Scanner, 2100 AWS Mini

LTE Dual Band 2100/2600 MHz

LTE Single Band E800 Mini

LTE Dual Band E800/2600 MHz

LTE Single Band 2600 MHz Mini

PCTEL MX E-UTRA bands 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21

R&S TSMW LTE FDD bands 700, 850, 900, 1800, 1900, 2100, 2100 AWS and 2600

(E-UTRA bands 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 17)

All LTE TDD bands

(E-UTRA bands 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40)

LTE Terminals

Huawei E398 E-UTRA bands 1, 3 and 8

Pantech UML290 E-UTRA FDD band 13

LG VL 600 E-UTRA FDD band 13

LG LTE L1000 Different variants

LG G7 E-UTRA bands 1 and 7 (2100MHz/2600MHz)

LG G13 E-UTRA band 13 (700MHz, Block C)

LG G17 E-UTRA bands 4 and 17 (2100AWS/700MHz, Block B)

Qualcomm MDM9200 E-UTRA bands 4 and 17

Qualcomm MDM9600 E-UTRA bands 1, 4, 11, 13 and 17


LTE frequency bands and channel bandwidths

COPY PROTECTION

From Nemo Outdoor 5.8 onward, only hardware-based copy protection is used. A USB copy

protection dongle will be delivered in the Nemo Outdoor package. Plug in the copy protection dongle

in a USB port on your PC.

Note that the new dongle introduced in Nemo Outdoor 5.80 will not be backwards compatible

with the older versions of Nemo Outdoor. A new dongle with a valid technical support and

maintenance agreement option will be in use with Nemo Outdoor 5.80 and later versions.

If you have problems starting Nemo Outdoor, and if the following error messages appear, please

contact Nemo Technical Support at [email protected].

No Valid License Detected

If the error message “Error: No valid license detected….” appears when the application is started,

either the dongle key is not plugged in or the dongle key is an unsupported model.


Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing dongle key. To

be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the old dongle key, it is recommended that

you uninstall Nemo Outdoor version 5.4. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the

previous version. The example above is seen, e.g. when the SPS 00868 dongle key is in use.

No Valid Technical Support Agreement

If the error message below appears, it means that the dongle key type is correct, but that the dongle

key is missing valid technical support & maintenance agreement information.

Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing dongle key with

the Remote Update Utility. To be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the dongle

key without information about the technical support agreement, it is recommended that you uninstall

Nemo Outdoor version 5.80. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the previous

version.

The old dongle key The new dongle key

The dongles are updated using the Remote Update Utility software. Before updating Nemo Outdoor

application please make sure that new dongle key is available. Note that you must use the latest

version of the software which comes with Nemo Outdoor version 5.80, or it can alternatively be

downloaded from Nemo User Club. See the instructions below for updating your Nemo Outdoor

dongle.


Updating the dongle (Nemo Outdoor version 5.80 and later)

1. Start the SecureUpdate by selecting Start | All Programs | Nemo Tools | Remote Update Utility.

2. The Collect Key Status Information tab opens.

3. Connect your copy protection module

4. Click Collect Information and select a location where the C2V file is saved.

5. Send the C2V file to Nemo Technical Support at [email protected].

Please add the following information to the e-mail using the following subject “Nemo Outdoor

dongle update”:

Company name

First name

Surname

Street address

Zip/ Postal Code

Country

Telephone number

Mobile number

6. After you have received the V2C file containing the update, select the Update File in the Apply

License Update tab and click Apply Update.


7. The dongle is now updated. Nemo Outdoor can be installed and is ready for use.

Technical Support Expiration

The new dongle keys used with Nemo Outdoor 5.80 and later versions include a compulsory technical

support and maintenance agreement option. The technical support expiration date defines the date

the agreement ends. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor

application. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 5.80 with a 1-year technical

support maintenance agreement in April 2011. The customer is entitled for free updates until April

2012. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2012 cannot be used with the dongle key without

renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. After the technical support & maintenance

agreement is renewed, the dongle key can be updated remotely and the customer can update the

application to the latest version.


IMPORTANT

End-User License Agreement

The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in

accordance with the terms of that agreement. For full details of this agreement, see Appendix 8 on

page 453.

Traffic Safety

Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. Remember, traffic safety comes

first.

Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time. Please

observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed. Finland assumes no

responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local legislation.

Operating Environment

Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the User Manual, including its warnings, for the devices

used by Nemo Outdoor.

Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is forbidden

to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger.

Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. It may interfere with nearby electronic

devices.

Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous.

Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations, fuel depots, chemical plants, or

sites where blasting operations are in progress.


NOTES

The Nemo Outdoor user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling behind

wireless technologies.

Especially note at this time that Anite Finland does not recommend using Toshiba laptop computers

with Nemo Outdoor. This is due to certain incompatibilities that may cause the USB port not working as

desired.

The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000, MSM6500, MSM6800, TM6200,

TM6250, TM6275, TM6275US, TM7200, and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that have not been

verified by Anite Finland. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but Anite Finland does not

guarantee that the terminals will work flawlessly. Please check the Nemo Outdoor product description

or the compatibility list in the user manual for a list of measurement terminals verified and approved by

Anite Finland.

Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobile’s keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo Outdoor

system is running.

With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. Otherwise, the mobile can dial a

wrong number.

With Nokia GSM, GPRS, and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be activated.

In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct levels.

Please refer to the Voice Quality Guide on page 389.

Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission power of

the mobile.

After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test mobile

into normal use, it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo Outdoor

triggered events in the mobile.

Use only the supplied connecting cable, included with the Nemo Outdoor, for connecting the Nemo

Outdoor test devices to the computer’s serial port.

When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use, the battery operation time is reduced

from normal use. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are regularly charged

and discharged as instructed in the mobile user manual.

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW 29

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW

VOICE TESTING

The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC (user provided

or, optionally, provided by Anite Finland with all the software installed) with the Windows® XP

Professional or Windows® Vista operating system. The package also includes the necessary

connecting cables, serial or USB port adapters, a GPS receiver, and fast frequency scanners if

applicable. Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available.


CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING

The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit (Nemo

Outdoor), an application server, and a dial-up server. The dial-up server is used to establish a data

connection between the measurement unit and the application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be

used as the application server. It is a Linux-based administration-free server having up to four public

IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo

Data Test Server supports FTP, SFTP, HTTP, POP3, SMTP, IPerf for UDP/TCP, Ping, Trace route

testing and RTSP (video streaming). CS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that

support circuit-switched data.

The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the

measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If you

are using a FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode)

test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit can only

receive files.

The user can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes, which in turn define the desired

transfer rate. During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error

rates on different network layers, as well as certain parameters, such as coding scheme and number

of timeslots.

PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING

The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement unit and

an application server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. It is a Linux-

based administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple

simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP, SFTP,

HTTP, POP3, SMTP, IPerf for UDP/TCP, Ping, Trace route testing, and RTSP (video streaming). PS

data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support packet-switched data.


The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. In the Send mode, the

measurement unit sends data packets to the application server; in the Receive mode vice versa. If you

are using an FTP server, the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode)

test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server, the measurement unit can only

receive files.

During the measurement, the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different

network layers, as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of timeslots.


NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI

The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution to be

used with Nemo Outdoor. The system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows

benchmarking measurements to be performed on different system technologies such as GSM, EDGE,

WCDMA, HSDPA, CDMA2000, and WiMAX, and different combinations of measurement modes such

as voice calls and data transfers. Nemo Outdoor Multi supports a total of seven test devices, i.e. up to

five test mobiles, scanners, and a GPS device. The Multi-Data functionality in Nemo Outdoor allows

up to five concurrent data measurements to be performed simultaneously while the system is

connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the

ease of use of the system. Combined with Nemo Server, Nemo Outdoor Multi-Data makes it easy to

carry out, not only casual data benchmarking test cases that can be used to compare the performance

of different technologies or operators, but also long-term network performance measurements.

All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing

a car’s +12VDC power output. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack

which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the

measurements. With the professional high-quality lockable USB data cable connection the system is

very reliable to use, preventing loose connections between test devices and the main unit. Nemo

Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional tough roll-around carrying case. The system is by

default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to be semi-permanently mounted into a

test car. The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine wave power inverter to supply power for

the laptop.


NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE

The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with

Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and

networks with support for up to six test mobiles/data cards, a scanner and a sound card. In addition,

the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of

measurement modes such as voice calls, voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously. The

system is connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding

to the ease of use of the system.


INDOOR MEASUREMENTS

Nemo Outdoor has an indoor measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be installed on a

Tablet PC. Alternatively normal laptop can be used as well. As GPS receivers cannot be used

indoors, the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. Just click markers along the

measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. You can use floorplans as maps.

INSTALLI NG NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM 35

INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM

This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices. Make

sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation. Use the Nemo Outdoor

setup program to install Nemo Outdoor; that is, do not just copy the Nemo Outdoor files onto your

computer.

HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS

PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows® XP (32- bit) Professional or Windows 7 ®

Professional (32-/64-bit).

Pentium III processor, minimum 1GHz, preferably 1.7 GHz for single mobile measurements

For multi data measurements Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher required

For voice quality measurements with up to four channels with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo

processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher required

For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Quad

Core processor Q9100 2.26GHz or higher required

512MB RAM minimum, 1GB RAM recommended

For multi data measurements with HSPA+ devices Intel® Quad Core processor Q9100

2.26GHz or higher required

100 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use; 1 GB recommended

One USB port for copy protection module

One USB port per mobile

Depending on the scanner used, one USB port or serial port or RJ45 or FireWire port per scanner

One serial port for each voice quality audio module or one USB port per sound card

One USB port for an external GPS receiver

Display resolution 1024 x 768 with 256 colors, 1280 x 1024 recommended

Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher for viewing the help file

If your computer does not have enough serial ports, the PCMCIA slot can be converted to one

or more serial ports by using a PCMCIA serial I/O adapter card or a USB serial converter. Refer

to Appendix 1 on page 345 for more information.

OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

The following hardware is also supported for using Nemo Outdoor. Please note that the scanning

receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e.g., from cigarette

lighter plug).

External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted


GPS receiver: (optional, following types are supported)

Garmin GPS II

Garmin GPS II Plus

Garmin GPS III/III+

Garmin GPS 35

Garmin V

Garmin 18 USB

Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit

Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output

DKU-2 USB cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:

Nokia 6230i

Nokia 6630

Nokia 6680

DKU-2 or CA-53 cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:

Nokia N80

Nokia 6136

Nokia N92

DKE-2 or mini USB cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:

Nokia 7376

Datang DTM8101 or DTM8120 mobile with the 18Pin SDTM 4.370.010 data cable and a free USB

port

Leadcore LC8310E mobile with the 18Pin SDTM 4.370.010 data cable and a free USB port

Nokia N75 mobile with the DKE-2 or the DKU-2 connectivity cable and a free USB port

Nokia N95, N95 US, 6120, 6121, or 3500 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port

Nokia C5, 6720, 6720US, N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97 and N97US mobile with the micro USB

cable and a free USB port

SAGEM OT 260 or OT 268 mobile with the single data cable

SAGEM OT 290, OT 298, OT 490 mobile with the 2 SL OT M42 Kit or USB cable

SAGEM OT 460, OT 490, OT498, OT590R mobile with a USB cable and a free USB port

Motorola V3X, V9 or V9US mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port

Huawei C7600 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port


Samsung SGH-Z105, Z107, Z140, Z500, ZV10, or P920mobile with the PCB157ULE USB cable

and a free USB port

Samsung Z560 or ZX20 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port

Samsung Z720, or A707 mobile with the PCB200BBE USB cable and a free USB port

Qualcomm CDMA2000 Compatible, MSM6500 Compatible, MSM6800 Compatible, TM6200,

TM6250, TM6275, TM6275US or TM7200 mobile with a USB cable and a free USB port

LG U800 or KU950 mobile with a mini USB cable and a free USB port

LG KX260, C270, C680, C676, and LHD-200E mobile with a LG VX6100/VX7000, KQ-U8A cable

and a free USB port

Nemo Outdoor Measurement Software is protected with a copy protection dongle. See page 23

for more information about copy protection.

NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

To install the Nemo Outdoor Measurement Software:

1. Start Windows® and insert the Nemo Outdoor CD-ROM in your CD drive (e.g., drive D).

Note that for Windows® XP and Windows® Vista, installation must be run under Administrator

account or other user account with administrative privileges.

2. Select Start | Run in the Windows® Status bar. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor 5\Nemo Outdoor x.xx.xx in

the Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button. When the Installation

program starts, follow the instructions on your screen.

3. When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete, you will need to restart the computer.

NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP

Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system.

However, instructions for devices that require a dial-up connection can be found in the Dial-Up

Networking Setup Guide.

Connecting SAGEM OT 260/268 Mobile

To connect the test mobile for measurement:

1. Insert a SIM card into the Nemo Outdoor test mobile.

2. Plug the single data cable into the computer physical serial port.

3. Plug the other end of the DMAC cable into the mobile.

4. Switch the Nemo Outdoor test mobile on.


Connecting a GPS Receiver

To connect the serial GPS receiver:

1. Plug the GPS data cable into a free serial port on your computer.

2. Plug the other end of the cable into the GPS receiver, if applicable.

3. Connect the cable of the GPS antenna unit to the GPS receiver, if applicable.

4. Connect the power cable to the GPS receiver (see the GPS receiver manual), if applicable.

5. Switch on the GPS receiver.

6. Start Nemo Outdoor. Open the Configuration Manager, select Device and click the Add button

.

7. Click on GPS. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next.

8. Select the serial port to which your GPS receiver is connected. The program automatically sets the

other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table:

Navigator Type Baud rate Data bits Parity Stop bits

Garmin GPS II 4800 8 None 1

Garmin GPS II Plus 4800 8 None 1

Garmin GPS III/III+ 4800 8 None 1

Garmin GPS 35 4800 8 None 1

Trimble Placer GPS 450/455

9600 8 None 1

9. Click OK. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements.

If your computer does not have enough serial ports, the PCMCIA slot can be converted to one

or more serial ports by using a PCMCIA serial I/O adapter card or a USB serial converter. Refer

to Appendix 1 on page 345 for more information.

To connect the USB GPS receiver:

1. Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer.

2. Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers.

3. Start Nemo Outdoor. Open the Configuration Manager, select Device and click the Add button

.

4. Click on GPS. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next.

5. Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected. The program automatically sets the

other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table:

Navigator Type Baud rate Data bits Parity Stop bits

Garmin 18 USB 9600 8 None 1

6. Click OK. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements.


Connecting a Scanner

See Scanner User Guide for information on how to connect and start scanners with Nemo Outdoor.

If an external fast frequency scanner for a computer’s serial port is used, follow these instructions in

order to connect the scanner to Nemo Outdoor. For a list of necessary hardware, refer to page 36.

Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device

Below you will see the two different options as of Nemo Outdoor Multi system that. See page 354 for

further information on how to set up the system.

The graph below depicts the system when it is purchased without the carrying case.


The graph below displays the system as when purchased with the carrying case.

Connecting Voice Quality Devices

Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide on page 375 for complete installation and configuration

instructions.


GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING

Check the condition of all antennas, cables, and connectors: there should be no tight curves, no

slashes or cuts.

Check that connectors are properly connected. Loose connections cause unstable measurements or

wrong attenuation of field strength.

Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as

possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows, and two wavelengths from

each other. If antennas are too close to each other, it may cause interference.

Check the configuration before starting the measurement.

Individual antennas and the mobile holder antenna couplers may have different performance.

When removing antennas after a drive test, DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna cables. Hold the

antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable.

= c / f c = 300E6 (m/s) f = frequency (Hz) 450 MHz, = 66 cm 900 MHz, = 33 cm 1800 MHz, = 17 cm 1900 MHz, = 16 cm GPS antenna 1565-1575MHz, = 19 cm


CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

After you have installed Nemo Outdoor, you will need to configure the system for your environment

before you will be able to use the measurement functions. The following instructions will help you in

this initial configuration.

CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR

You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. For a first-time user the most convenient

way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. Older users of Nemo Outdoor may

want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog, and more advanced users may want to configure

Nemo Outdoor manually.

Configuration through Welcome page

1. The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a first-time

user, and also helps more advanced users to add new devices. It appears on the screen when

you start Nemo Outdoor. If you do not want to view this window in the future when opening Nemo

Outdoor, select the Do not show this again option.

2. With the Automatic device detection functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool,

you can automatically add devices to Nemo Outdoor without needing to manually set up the

system. This functionality automatically searches the Device Manager for the assigned modem

and trace COM port information, and matches a dial-up connection with the assigned modem port

for the device.

Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a USB

cable. Furthermore, you may need to select the correct device model from the drop-down menu.

CONFIGURATIO N SETTI NGS 43

Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. In addition, you may need to

create a dial-up connection for the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor. The COM

ports are created with the dial-up connection. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up

Networking Setup Guide for instructions on how to do this. The device may also require

additional configurations in its modem settings.

3. You can start the devices in online mode by clicking the Start Devices button below, start them in

offline mode by clicking the Work Offline button, or refresh the device configuration by clicking the

Refresh button on the bottom right-hand corner of the window. This is useful, e.g., when you

accidentally unplug a device and plug it in again.

4. You can also browse for a workspace file (similar to File/Open Workspace) from the welcome

dialog.

5. In the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations. This

includes the dial-up connection and the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device. If

you would like to start Nemo Outdoor in online mode, select a pre-made device configuration and

a workspace and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration file will

be activated and you are ready to start measurements.


6. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and

starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration in the Open a Device

Configuration tool and click the Work Offline button. If you want, you can configure the devices

manually and activate them. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the

measurement system and click the Work Offline button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

7. The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the

attached devices for playback. In the Workspace field you can select a workspace for the

measurement. Click Load Selected Files.


Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog

To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click Other… in the Open a Device Configuration

field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window.

1. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a workspace,

Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and a workspace. If you are

a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor, go to step 4.

2. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a pre-made

device configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the

device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.


3. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and

starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work

Offline button in the Load Device Configuration dialog. You can change the measurement

configurations in the offline mode and activate the device. When you want to activate the devices,

connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Online button in the

Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

4. In the Load Device Configuration dialog, select Empty Device Configuration and click Start

Devices. An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears.

5. Add a device by selecting Measurement | Add New Device. Choose the appropriate phone,

scanner, or GPS receiver from the list and click Next.

6. All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler. Nemo Outdoor application

detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly. For example, if device

supports MDM8200 chipset (HSPA+) these trace messages are automatically activated. Before

trace message activation application is checking is the licence valid for such a device. If license do

not cover e.g. MDM8200 devices (HSPA+ devices), device is added to Nemo Outdoor application

with an other chipset support e.g. MDM7200 (HSUPA) and HSPA+ trace messages are not

activated. The following Qualcomm chipsets are supported:

Qualcomm TM6200

Qualcomm TM6250

Qualcomm TM6275 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices

Qualcomm TM6275 US - Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices

Qualcomm TM6280 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices


Qualcomm TM7200 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSUPA devices

Qualcomm TM8200 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ devices

Qualcomm TM8220 - Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ dual carrier devices

Qualcomm MDM9200 - Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices

Qualcomm MDM9600 - Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices

7. A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device. Set the appropriate values and click

OK.

8. Click on Measurement Properties in the Phone/Scanner Properties dialog to enter the

Measurement Properties dialog. Here you will find device-specific measurement settings. Set the

appropriate parameters and click OK.

9. Double-click the User Interface item in the Configuration Manager (alt+M) to open the User

Interface Properties dialog. Here you will find general measurement settings that affect all devices.

Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. You can now start the measurements.

Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually

If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device

Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and

select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File |

Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode. Alternatively, you can

go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements.

In addition, you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a previously

added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up connection for network measurements. You can

either go to Measurement | Autodetect Devices, or go click the Configuration Manager icon in

the toolbar and select Autodetect Devices in the Configuration Manager window.


A dialog with a list of previously added devices and their dial-up connection appears. Select the

devices you want to add, and click the Add Devices tab at the bottom of the Autodetect Devices

dialog. Select Add Devices in Specific Order to select the order of the added devices.

In the Add Devices dialog you can select a device and move it up or down in the list to define the

device order with the arrow buttons on the right-hand side of the dialog.

Click Add Devices to add the devices to Nemo Outdoor.

Use Case 1. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup

The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start recording

automatically when devices are connected and started.

In the user interface, perform the following configurations.

1. Go to View | User Interface Properties.

2. On the General page, select the Start recording automatically when devices are started option.


3. On the Measurement page select Yes in the Start scripts automatically field.

4. Click OK.

5. Save the workspace and hardware configuration files by selecting File | Save Workspace As,

and File | Save Device Configuration As.

6. Close Nemo Outdoor. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor, measurements will start

automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are selected.

CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES

The Phone Settings of the Nemo Outdoor test mobile can be user defined. However, the PIN Code

Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF. Please consult the mobile user

manual to find these options from the mobile. To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for PS data

testing purposes, see the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland.

Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger, if possible, when carrying out

measurements.

Net Monitoring must be switched off with the Nokia mobiles listed below:

Nokia 6230i


CONFIGURATION MANAGER VIEW Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration Manager view

in Nemo Outdoor. You can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking the Configuration

Manager toolbar button .

The Configuration Manager view consists of several items. All these items, except Handler

Information, can be configured. Select an item from the list and click the Properties button .

The default System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor.

Double-clicking on the Measurement Properties item leads to the User Interface | Measurement view on page 55.


Handler Information

Under Handler Information, you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your computer.

All the handlers that you have purchased can be found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-ROM.

Each device has its own handler, and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor, you must have the

corresponding handler installed.


User Interface

The user interface (UI) of Nemo Outdoor is very flexible so that you can configure the windows and

graphs to serve your needs. Under the User Interface item, you will find seven items: User Interface

Properties, Custom Windows, Notifications, Scripts, Color Palettes, Color sets, Presentation

modes, and View Groups. The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for

quick startup. Under Color Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see page 59). Clicking on

Color Sets will view the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view. For further information

on how to create color sets, see page 278. You can define the format in which various parameter

values are presented through the Presentation modes item (see page 58). View Groups refers to sets

of windows that are open at the same time. See page 307 for more information on using the view

groups.

Select the User Interface Properties button and double-click on it to open the User Interface

Properties dialog.


User Interface Properties – General

Buffer Size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of the user interface. The size

of the buffer affects how far back you can view a file during measurement.

Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved when

you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically, for example, windows will be opened the

next time you start the SW.

Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo

Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup, and also when changing from offline mode

to online mode.

Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test calls

after the measurement is ended.

Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a message

when the measurement has been paused.

Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there is a

problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing.

Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open the

Script Status window when script files are used in measurements.

Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples used in

audio quality measurements also during playback.

When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected, the Welcome to

Nemo Outdoor window is displayed.


With the Show ‘Stop Recording Query’ dialog before recording is stopped option selected, a

dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop recording.

Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you to exit

the Full Screen mode through an UI button.

When the Show ‘Enable Missing Neighbor Query’ dialog when recording is started option is

selected, a notification dialog will appear reminding you to enable missing neighbor detection when a

scanner and a test terminal are connected to Nemo Outdoor and missing neighbor detection is not

currently enabled. If you agree to enable the missing neighbor detection functionality through the

dialog, the Missing Neighbor Detection dialog will appear. However, note that you are not able to

enable the missing neighbor functionality if active measurement properties do not support missing

neighbor detection. In that case recording must be stopped and measurement properties changed

before the missing neighbor functionality can be enabled.

User Interface Properties – Measurement

By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will access the

Measurement tab in the User Interface Properties dialog. Here you can make settings affecting all

measurements.

Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day

hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below.

For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last number

(%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day.


%a Abbreviated weekday name

%A Full weekday name

%b Abbreviated month name

%B Full month name

%d Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31)

%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23)

%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12)

%j Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366)

%m Month as decimal number (01 – 12)

%M Minute as decimal number (00 – 59)

%n Sequence number (1 – )

%N Sequence number (1 – )

%p Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock

%S Second as decimal number (00 – 59)

%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53)

%w Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0)

%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53)

%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99)

%Y Year with century, as decimal number

%z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings;

no characters if time zone is unknown

%Z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings;


With the Start scripts automatically option, you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing the script

file when you click the Start Recording button in the main window.

With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement mobile to

return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. When the option is set to No, the mobile will stay in the

current state when script is stopped. You can use this option to keep a GPRS mobile in active state

when toggling a script on and off.

Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop

recording after the script is finished.

If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts, select the Synchronize

script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all devices are finished before

repeating the scripts.


With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start of the

measurement. During measurements, Nemo Outdoor will use PC time.

Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start measuring

only after there is a GPS fix.

Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is dropped

during measurements. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be redialed.

Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions from

the device when the device is started.

When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes, Outdoor uses the ETSI

specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call

User Interface Properties – Paths

In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. In the picture above, you can see the

default values. To change the default paths, click on the … button and browse for a new location. In

the Default Map field, you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. A World.tab map file is

provided by Anite Finland in the installation package. Local Files refers to the files that are used in

FTP testing. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing. Default Color Set refers to the

color set that is opened by default on the map. For instructions on making new color sets, see page

278.


Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications In the Sounds field, select C:\Nemo

Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo

Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds.

Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners.

User Interface Properties – Presentation

In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are presented.


User Interface Properties – Colors

In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices, graph lines, and map routes. The first eight

colors are reserved for devices. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and map routes.

To make new palettes, click the New button, type a name for the new palette, and define all the colors.

To change the palette, select a palette from the Color palette list.


Notifications

Notifications are graphical, textual, and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo Outdoor

includes some premade notifications, but you can also add your own notifications. The notifications

come in handy when you are looking for certain events, parameters, or values in the measurement

file. Depending on your configuration, Nemo Outdoor will either play a sound or display a .png image

in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during measurements. A textual notification is

displayed in the Output window by default.

By double-clicking a notification the Notification window appears. There you can make changes to, for

example, sound files and icons associated with the notification.


Notification Configuration

To make your own notifications, expand the Notifications item in the Configuration Manager window.

Double-click the User Configurable item to open the Notifications dialog.

The table displays all existing notifications. From the table you can see the notification title and the

selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. Activate a sound and/or bitmap file for a

notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list.

Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. Browse a sound file in the field or use the

default file. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. In the User Interface Properties –

Paths dialog, define which one you would like to use (see page 57). Use the Play button to listen to

the file. If you want to attach your own sound files (.wav) to the notifications, you should create the

sound files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male or C:\Nemo

Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female.

Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. Browse a bitmap file in the

field or use the default file. The button will display a preview of the selected image. If you want to

attach your own bitmaps to the notifications, you should create the files and add them in the folder

C:\Nemo Tools\ Nemo Shared Files \Images.


Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog.

Title defines a name for the notification.

Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification.

Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about certain

events only once.

Click the Field button and select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Then define

the Condition and Value for the selected parameter. Finally click Add to list to add the new criteria

for the notification. You can add several criteria for each notification. Finally click OK and the

notification is saved and added in the Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and bitmap

files to the notification.

The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where you

can activate the notification for a specific device.


To activate a notification for a particular device, click the Configure Notifications button in the

Device Info window. This will open the Measurement Properties, Notifications dialog. Select the

notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK.

The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device. Select the

notification from the list and select how you would like to be notified. The Notification Properties

button will open the Notification Configuration dialog where you can edit the notification settings

(see page 61 for more information).

By clicking the Select All and Clear All buttons, you can select and clear all items in the list.

To make user-configurable notifications:

1. Open the Notifications dialog (Configuration Manager, Notifications, double-click on User-

Configurable) and click Add.

2. In the Notification Criteria dialog, define the notification criteria and click OK.

3. In the Notifications dialog, select the notification that you just created. Define sound and bitmap

files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the notifications table.

4. Click OK to save the settings.


Scripts

Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners.

Under the Script item you will find premade scripts and user-defined scripts. Scripts can be used to

perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data transfers. Double-

click the Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view. Double-click on any of

these scripts to open the Script Editor dialog.

Creating Script files is described in more detail on page 162.


Device Configurations

Under Device Configurations, you will find a list of device configuration files (.hwc). A device

configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations. You can use the

device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without having to detect and

configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor.

You can load a .hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. Alternatively, you can load a

device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device Configuration

dialog. To make new device configurations, add devices manually in Nemo Outdoor and configure

them. When everything is ready, select File | Save Device Configuration As and type a name for the

saved file. The new .hwc file will appear in the Configuration Manager, Device Configurations folder.

To rename a device configuration, double-click the respective item in the Configuration Manager and

type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog.


Devices

Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor. Note that

you can add a new device from the plus icon , and remove a device by selecting the device and

clicking on the minus icon . Each device (mobile, GPS, and scanner) has its own properties dialog.

Double-clicking on the device will open the applicable device properties dialog. These dialogs are

presented next.


Phone Properties

The field at the top displays the device type and model. Below that field is a field displaying the current

status of the device. The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the

phone, and makes it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label

can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback, and the

information is also stored in the log file header.


Trace Port and Modem Port

Motorola mobiles: Trace port is the port assigned to Motorola Network Monitor. You will find this

port from Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device

Manager button). Expand the Ports item and you will find the Motorola Network Monitor (COMx)

there.

Nokia 2G mobiles: Trace port is the port where the DAU-9P, DKU-2, or DKU-5 cable is connected.

Nokia 3G mobiles: Three modem ports are created, the first of which is the trace port, the second

the modem port and the third the port for dial-up connection. Note that in the modem properties for

Nokia 3G phones, an additional “atz” command needs to be added for the connection to work.

Please refer to the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further information.

SAGEM GPRS mobiles: Trace port is the port where the SL2 cable or USB cable is connected.

SAGEM GSM mobiles: Trace port is the port where the single data cable is connected.

Samsung and Qualcomm mobiles: Trace port is the port assigned to Qualcomm Diagnostics

Interface. You will find this port from Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel | System |

Hardware | Device Manager button). Expand the Ports item and you will find the Qualcomm

Diagnostics Interface (COMx) item there.

Data cards: Trace port is the port assigned to Novatel Wireless UMTS Modem Secondary port.

You will find this port from Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel | System |

Hardware | Device Manager button). Expand the Ports item and you will find the Novatel

Wireless UMTS Modem Secondary port item and the corresponding COM port.

Nokia mobiles: Modem port is the port where you installed the modem during dial-up networking

installation. With a DKU-5 cable, the modem port is the same as the trace port.

SAGEM GPRS mobiles: Modem port is the port where the SL1 cable is connected.

Samsung and Qualcomm mobiles: In the Modem Port field select the port assigned to the

Qualcomm Proprietary USB Modem. The USB cable should be connected to this port.

Please note that certain Qualcomm-compatible devices do not support the use of a modem

port. With these devices the modem port selection can be left empty.

Data cards: In the Modem Port field select the port assigned to Novatel Wireless UMTS Modem

Primary Port. You will find this port from Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel |

System | Hardware | Device Manager button). Expand the Modems item and you will find the

Novatel Wireless UMTS Modem Primary Port item and the corresponding COM port.

Circuit Switched Dial-Up Connection list box gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have

been configured on your computer. If you are making CS data measurements, select a dial-up

connection here. See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed

instructions for configuring dial-up connections.

Packet Switched Dial-Up Connection list box gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have

been configured on your computer. If you are making PS data measurements, select a dial-up

connection here. See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed

instructions for configuring dial-up connections.


Antenna Gain and Cable Loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion

from dBm to dBuV/m. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. If you are

using the internal antenna of each phone, leave these values blank.

Antenna

type

Frequency

range

Antenna

gain (dBd)

Impedance VSWR 1 Max

power

Polarization Cable

loss

Cable &

connector

1140.27 824–894/1710–1880/

1850–2170

MHz

0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @

specified

freq.

10 W Linear

vertical

-0.55/ -

0.82

dB/m

Mini Low

Loss 2.5 m,

SMA male

1140.26 890–960/1850–1990/

1710–2170

MHz

0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @

specified

freq.

10 W Linear

vertical

Mini Low

Loss 2.5 m,

SMA male

The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite Finland Ltd. or Smarteq. If

you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers, you will have to ask the antenna gain and

cable loss information from the manufacturer.

Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality

measurements. You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the drop-

down menu.

Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality measurements.

Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu.

Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements.

After you have configured the device, click the Apply button to check that the device is working

properly. To exit the dialog, click OK.

Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog

where you can make device-specific measurement settings. You can also enter the Measurement

Properties dialog through Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties in the menu

bar.


Scanner Properties

The Device information field displays the device type and model. In the Label field you can define a

suitable label for the device, for example, a name or a usage purpose, making it easier to identify the

device during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user

interface during a measurement and playback, and the information is also stored in the log file header.

Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected.

Baud Rate refers to the communication speed.

Antenna Gain and Cable Loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion

from dBm to dBuV/m by some radio network planning tools. See the tables below for the antenna gain

and cable loss values for the PCTEL LX UMTS scanner.

Antenna gain for PCTEL EX/LX scanner:

PCTEL Part Antenna Maxrad Part

Base Maxrad Part Type Frequency Gain

OP039 MLPV1700 RBGML195MSMA Single 1700-2700MHz 4dBi

OP042 MLPVDB800/ 1900

RBGML195MSMA Dual Band

806-960 MHz

and

1710-1990 MHz

3dBi/4dBi

OP078H 698-2300MHz 1dBi

OP079 690-920 MHz >1dBi @ 690-780 MHz >0 dBi @ 785-920 MHz


Cable loss for PCTEL EX/LX scanner:

Frequency db/100 ft.

2.5 GHz 19/100'

2.4 GHz 28/100’

1.8 GHz 16/100'

1.6 GHz 22/100’

900 MHz 11.1/100' 16/100’

Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog

where you can make device-specific measurement settings (see page 72).



GPS Properties

The field at the top displays the device type and model. In the Label field you can define a label for the

GPS device, for example, a name or a usage purpose, making it easier to identify devices during

measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during

a measurement and playback, and the information is also stored in the log file header.

Serial Port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected.

Baud Rate refers to the communication speed. The available values are 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600.

Data Bits, Parity and Stop Bits are other communication-related parameters. The available values

for Data bits are 5, 6, 7, and 8, the options for Parity are Even, None, and Odd. The default value for

Stop bits is 1. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. Check your GPS receiver

documentation.




MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES

The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the device

type (mobile or scanner), on the device model (Nokia, Anritsu, LG, etc.), and on the technology

supported by the device (UMTS, CDMA, LTE, etc.).

Measurement Properties – General

Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that Nemo

Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile, for example, Sonera, A1, and DTX. Note that you

should enter the name yourself, as Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is

using. The network name is presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network

you have been monitoring.

BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map. If you have a GPS receiver

connected to the system, you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a line will be drawn

from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. Click the … button to browse for a BTS file

(.nbf).


By clicking the Advanced button, you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. Here you can

enable and disable various measurement options such as layer messages. If you disable some of the

options, the disabled messages will not be recorded in the measurement file. This will decrease output

file size. The selection depends on the measurement device used. The parameters in the

Measurement Options list vary depending on the device.

Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data connections

384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement terminal.

To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback, you need to enable the packet decoding

function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture

field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany

the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information

in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.

Please note that when measuring with a LX GSM/WCDMA scanner in a WCDMA network, the

internal GPS receiver should be activated.


Measurement Properties – Measurement Settings

You are able to make measurement type specific configurations by clicking the corresponding field in

the dialog. The Measurement Settings page of the Measurement Properties dialog is available for

mobiles only.

Voice Call opens the Voice Call Properties dialog. See page 106 for more information.

Short Messaging Service button opens the SMS Testing dialog. See page 143 for more information

on SMS testing.

Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings, MMS dialog. See page

145 for more information on MMS testing.

Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog. See page115 for more information.

DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a voice

call.

Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. See page 111 for more information.

Packet Session opens the Packet Session Settings dialog. See page 116 for more in formation.

Selected Data Protocol defines which data protocol is used to perform data transfers. Clicking the Supported Data Protocols field opens a list of supported data protocols. Clicking the field of a selected data protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol.

Enable VoIP Measurements option, when selected, opens the SIP server and VoIP call dialogs. See page 141 for more information.


Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Mobiles

Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal

supports frequency scanning.

Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the mobile.

Scanning Options view lets you choose among various scanning options.

Selecting the BSIC Decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window.

The TOP-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM. With

TOP-N scanning it is possible to get TOP-N channel results for each band, e.g. for EGSM, GSM900

and GSM1800. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators.


If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection, the Select Channels dialog appears.

Select one band from the list or all of them. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands

you want to scan. If all bands are selected, you have the possibility to select Remove All | ... items

from every band. Alternatively, if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the

current band through Remove All | ...items from current band.

The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to the

Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-

click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning, click the

Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at

the bottom of the dialog and to click Add.

To remove channels from the Selected list, click on the channel you want to remove and then click the

Remove button or double-click the channel. To remove all channels, click the Remove All button. You

can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on the

channels you want to add or remove.


If TOP-N option is selected, the following dialog appears through the Channel Configuration...

button.

In the TOP-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between which the

TOP-N channels are recorded. Define the number of strongest channels to be searched in the TOP-N

field. The maximum number of TOP-N channels is 32. You can click on the Clear all button to clear

the table.

Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Mobiles

Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal

supports pilot scanning.


The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile.

In the Scanning Options view you can select Missing neighbor detection as a scanning mode.

Select a value for the CPICH RSCP threshold field. The device will only report cells with CPICH

RSCP above the set value.

Click on the Channel Configuration button to enter the Select Channels view.

In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the

Available view. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu, channels from all bands will be viewed.

You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. If all bands are selected,

you have the possibility to select Remove All | ... items from every band. Alternatively, if only one

band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | ...items

from current band.

The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to the

Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-

click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning, click the

Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at

the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. Click OK to exit the dialog.


Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Scanners

The Frequency scanning page of the Measurement Properties dialog is further divided into sub-pages

based on the cellular technology supported by the scanner. The contents of the sub-pages are

technology-specific.

Frequency Scanning with GSM Scanners

Note that the available options are device specific.

Channel style defines the style of the measured channel. For GSM the options are 200 kHz and 30

kHz narrow.

Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Note that the

available selection depends on the scanner type.

RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level, in dB, of the number of samples.

Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is

written to file.

Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window.

BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports.


Select the BCCH C/I option to activate C/I measurements for the BCCH channel. This option is

available with the PCTEL GSM scanner only.

Cell information decoding. Mobile Network Code, Mobile Country Code and Cell ID information can

be decoded from BCCH messages. Note that this is only enabled in online mode and if the option has

been purchased with the scanner.

When the System information decoding option is selected, L3 messages are written in the log file.

By clicking the Select Channels button, you can access a dialog where you select the channels that

will be scanned.

First select the Band. Click on a channel in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply

double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning, click

the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the

field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add.

To remove channels from the Selected list, click on the channel you want to remove and then click the

Remove button or double-click the channel. To remove all channels, click the Remove All button. You

can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on the

channels you want to add or remove. Click OK to exit the dialog.


Frequency Scanning with UMTS Scanners


Channel style refers to the style of the channel.





written to file.

By clicking the Select Channels button, you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).


Frequency Scanning with LTE Scanners







written to file.



Frequency Scanning with CDMA/EV-DO Scanners







written to file.



Frequency Scanning with WiMAX Scanners







written to file.

By clicking the Select Frequencies button, you can access the Select Frequencies dialog (see page

80).


Frequency Scanning with TD-SCDMA Scanners







written to file.



Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Scanners

The Pilot scanning page of the Measurement Properties dialog is further divided into sub-pages based

on the cellular technology supported by the scanner. The contents of the sub-pages are technology-

specific.

Pilot Scanning with UMTS Scanners


CPICH Ec/No threshold defines the minimum level for the CPICH Ec/No. If the values are below the

threshold, the pilots are not reported.


Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. In aggregate

method, the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. If there are no

peaks above the PN threshold, value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA.


Pilot measurement mode defines the measurement mode for pilot scanning.

In High speed mode scanning speed is higher but sensitivity is lower. In high speed mode, weak

pilots may be undetected.

In High dynamic mode scanning speed is lower but sensitivity is higher.

Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then

reports the result.

Number of fingers defines the maximum number of fingers used for RAKE in measurement.

Selective level determines a valid path. Set a value (in dB) to decide a valid path from the noise floor

(average value).

Rake threshold determines a valid path (in dB). Subtracting the set value from a path with a

maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path.

Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. If enabled, scanner will report results

from N best scrambling codes. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by

scanner in Top-N mode.

Time of arrival defines if the selected scanner will measure the time of arrival for each scrambling

code. The time of arrival value is relative to GPS time and is measured in chips.

Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for

each scanned scrambling code. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and

first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold.

When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event

(NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a grid

view.

When the Neighbor list decoding option is selected, the NLIST (neighbor list) event is written in the

log file for both GSM and WCDMA.

Delay profile option enables/disables delay profile scanning. The Channel number field provides a

list of channels that can be selected for scanning.

Finger option enables and disables Finger measurements for the scanner.

P-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the P-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code.

SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each

scrambling code.

S-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the S-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code.



The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can

select channels for pilot scanning. If you press the arrow, a drop-down menu will appear from where

you can select Top-N Search Configuration.

Please note that the Top-N Search Configuration dialog is available for Anritsu UMTS scanners

only.

In the Top-N Search Configuration dialog you can limit the search performed by the scanner and

consequently speed up the search.

Group specifies the group number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 63.

Cell specifies the cell number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 7.

Secondary code specifies the secondary scrambling code. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0.

Channelization code specifies the channelization code. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0.

Search method defines how the search is performed. P-CPICH (primary common pilot channel)

searches with P-CPICH. SCH performs a three-step search with P-SCH and S-SCH.


Pilot Scanning with LTE Scanners



Cyclic prefix defines the type of signal the scanner is set to measure. With Autodetect selected, the

scanner will automatically detect the appropriate signal type.




Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. The available options are 1:1, 1:2,

1:4 and 1:8. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged, with ratio 1:2 every second

sample is logged, with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged, and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is

logged. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size, but the scanning

accuracy will be diminished.

RSSI threshold determines a valid path (in dB). Subtracting the set value from a path with a



from N best cells. Number of cells field indicates the number of best cells you want the scanning to

notify you of. Up to 16 sectors are reported with specific cell ID.


CINR option activates/deactivates Carrier to Interference and Noise Ratio measuring. Carrier refers to

either reference signal power or sync signal power depending on the selected signal type.

Time offset refers to the number of samples between P-SCH Primary Synchronization Signal arrival

time with respect to receiver frequency reference that is derived from GPS reference time.

Sync signal refers to the ratio between the synchronization channel, i.e., primary and secondary

signal received power and the interference and noise from the same synchronization signal set.

Reference signal refers to the ratio between the reference signal received power (RSRP) and the

interference and noise from the same reference signal set.


select channels for pilot scanning. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device

specific.

When you select LTE channels, you can also define some channel-specific settings. In the LTE

Channel Specific Settings dialog, select the channel from the Selected channels list and define the

settings.


Uplink-downlink configuration refers to LTE TDD frame structure.

Frame structure type 2 is applicable to TDD. Each radio frame of length ms 10307200 sf TT

consists of two half-frames of length ms 5153600 s T each. Each half-frame consists of five subframes

of length ms 107203 s T . The supported uplink-downlink configurations are listed in the table below

where, for each subframe in a radio frame, “D” denotes the subframe is reserved for downlink

transmissions, “U” denotes the subframe is reserved for uplink transmissions and “S” denotes a

special subframe with the three fields DwPTS, GP and UpPTS.


One slot, Tslot=15360 Ts

GPUpPTS

DwPTS

One radio frame , Tf = 307200Ts = 10 ms

One half -frame, 153600 Ts = 5 ms

30720Ts

One subframe , 30720 Ts

GP UpPTS

D wPTS

Subframe #2 Subframe #3 Subframe #4Subframe #0 Subframe #5 Subframe #7 Subframe #8 Subframe #9

Frame structure type 2 (for 5 ms switch-point periodicity):

Uplink-downlink configuration

Downlink-to-Uplink Switch-point periodicity

Subframe number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 5 ms D S U U U D S U U U 1 5 ms D S U U D D S U U D 2 5 ms D S U D D D S U D D 3 10 ms D S U U U D D D D D 4 10 ms D S U U D D D D D D 5 10 ms D S U D D D D D D D 6 5 ms D S U U U D S U U D

Pilot Scanning with EV-DO Scanners







Pilot window mode defines the position of the chips that are searched for pilot across in regard to the

ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot).

For Pilot window search mode the options are Standard, Wide and Very Wide. The Wide and Very

Wide options can be used to detect pilots far away from the base stations. The sensitivity will not be

affected but the scanning speed will be slower as the search window is increased.






Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0. If the values are below the

threshold, the pilots are not scanned.




Delay option enables/disables delay profile scanning. Delay is defined as the measured difference

between the expected arrival time (GPS time) and the actual arrival time of the maximum peak above

the PN threshold. It is reported in chips.

Overhead message decoding, when selected, enables the scanner to decode PCH messages.



specific.


Pilot Scanning with CDMA Scanners



Chip window size defines the length of pilot window in chips from 1 to 64. This value is used to

establish the number of chips to be searched for pilot across (Pilot Window Length) and to define the

position of these chips Pilot Window Mode in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a

given pilot).

Correlator affects how the scanner works. Bigger correlator size enables the scanner to detect and

measure Pilot channels with better dynamic but makes scanning speed slower. For example, when

using correlator size 2048 versus 512, the dynamic range for pilot measurement changes from –21db

to –17db.









TOP-N mode option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. If enabled, scanner will

report results from N best pilots. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the

scanner in TOP-N mode.







specific.

Pilot Scanning with WiMAX Scanners




method, the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated.

Top-N option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. If enabled, scanner will report

results from N best preambles. Number of preambles field defines how many preambles are reported

by the scanner in TOP-N mode.


CINR refers to the Carrier to Interference and Noise ratio value, in dB *100 (e.g., -16.34). It is based

on the requested reuse factor.

Preamble delay refers to the number of samples between expected arrival time and actual arrival

time of preamble with respect to GPS time reference. The values range from 0 to 1023+32. Each

sample corresponds to 89.285 nanoseconds.

Reuse factor refers to a system design parameter that can be manipulated to achieve the desired

balance between the interference and the network coverage. The WiMAX air interface modulating

waveform has been divided into three segments (Segment 0, 1 and 2). The allocation of frequency

sub-carrier into these three segments is done in such a way that e.g. a downlink signal on segment 0

will not interfere with the downlink signal on segment 1. In a Reuse Factor 1 measurement,

contributions from all the three segments are considered in the measured parameters, so that the

CINRs are calculated from all the three segments. When Reuse Factor 3 is selected, only the

contribution of the desired segment is considered, and the CINRs are calculated only from the same

segment. As a broad guideline, measurements performed with Reuse Factor 1 will provide the signal

quality of the all the detected preambles relative to each other, whereas the Reuse Factor 3 category

of measurements will provide the signal quality of preambles within the same segment.




The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80) where you

can select frequencies for scanning. The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is

device specific.


Pilot Scanning with TD-SCDMA Scanners











results from N best pilots. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner

in TOP-N mode.




scrambling code.


The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80) where you

can select frequencies for scanning. The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is

device specific.

Pilot Scanning with DVB-H Scanners


Frequency defines the frequency scanned.


Measurement Properties – Spectrum Scanning

In the Spectrum scanning page you can define frequencies that will be scanned.

Use preamplifier option should be selected if the signal level is less than -50 dB. This will increase

the scanner sensitivity, hence slightly decreasing background noise. However, it is recommended that

it is not selected when signal volume is higher than -50dBm.

Select the Enable spectrum scanning option and click Add.


Set start and stop frequencies defines the frequency range that will be scanned. Define the start

and stop frequencies within which the measurement will be performed. If you manually define the start

and stop frequencies, you can either select to add the frequencies to the scanning list or save them as

a predefined set. Select your option by pressing the Add to Scanning List button.

Set center frequency and bandwidth defines the frequency range that will be scanned. Define the

center frequency and the bandwidth. If you manually define the center frequency and bandwidth, you

can either select to add them to the scanning list, or save them as a predefined set. Select your option

by pressing the Add to Scanning List button.

Sample count determines the sample count measured for the given frequency range.

You can define Predefined scanning sets which you can use to quickly select the frequency range to

be scanned. Just double-click a set from the list and the predefined values will be selected. To create

new scanning sets, define the scanning frequencies at the top of the dialog, press the Add to

Scanning List button and select Save as Predefined Set.


Define a name for the set in the Enter Frequency Set Name dialog and click OK.


Measurement Properties - Script

In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement, click the Device Settings button in the

Devices window and select Script Properties.

In the Script File field, browse the script file that you want to use. There are some premade script files

available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor (see page 140).

With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups. The scripts in the same

group are synchronized with each other. Devices can be assigned for certain script groups. By default

the script group is selected as <None>, but the user can also create new script groups by selecting

<New group> in the Script group drop-down menu, and typing the name of the new script group in

the field. A script group can be also saved with a specific name. To be able to use script groups, the

Synchronize script repeats option must be selected in the User Interface Properties (see page 55).

When a script group is selected as <None>, but Synchronize script repeats option is selected, all

script files that belong to the same <None> group are synchronized.

Script groups can be used, e.g., with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice quality

terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. For example, script files

used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group, and their script files are

synchronized with one another, whereas the PS data scripts belong to the second script group. The

script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for each device.


MEASUREMENT MODES

CALL MODE MEASUREMENT

The Nemo Outdoor Call mode is designed for tracing and evaluating; the quality of an existing digital

network, for example, for tuning purposes. The results can be used, for instance, for determining the

optimum handover and power control parameters. A complete description of the file format can be

found in the File Format manual provided by Anite Finland.

In Call mode, calls and data transfers can be made and/or the phone can be left in an idle state, during

which time measurements are carried out. Nemo Outdoor can also execute measurements according to

a user-defined script file. In addition, if the Nemo Outdoor Measurement system is equipped with a GPS

receiver, then also the position information is stored by the system.

FREQUENCY SCANNING MEASUREMENTS IN GSM

Nemo Outdoor Frequency Scan mode is designed for frequency planning of an existing digital

network, for example, for tuning and interference measurement purposes.

Frequency scanning is available with SAGEM and certain Nokia mobiles or with a separate fast

frequency scanner.

Scanning with a Mobile

By using the mobile, all the carrier frequencies of the current wireless system (GSM900, 1800, or

900/1800 only) and their field strength values in the geographical region concerned can be observed.

In addition, if the Nemo Outdoor measurement system is equipped with a GPS receiver, the position

information is also stored by the system.

Frequency scanning results contain the field strength values for all carriers. The results can be used,

for instance, for frequency planning (placing BTS sites) and interference measurement.

Scanning with a Fast Frequency Scanner

When using a fast frequency scanner, only the specified channels or pilot numbers are scanned. In

addition, if the Nemo Outdoor measurement system is equipped with a GPS receiver, the position

information is also stored by the system. The scanning made with a fast frequency scanner is more

accurate than the scanning made with a mobile. The inaccuracy with a GSM mobile is +/- 3 dB and

with a scanner +/- 1 - +/- 1.5 dB.

Frequency scanning results contain the field strength values for the selected carriers and the decoded

BSIC/SAT values. The results can be used, for instance, for frequency planning (placing BTS sites)

and interference measurement.

See page 453 for more information on scanner measurements.

MEASUREMENT MODES 103

SCANNING MODE MEASUREMENT IN UMTS

Frequency Scan Mode

Nemo Outdoor Frequency Scan mode is designed for basic frequency domain monitoring or spectrum

analysis. The scanning receiver can be used in variable bandwidth modes to check the existence of

wanted or unwanted radio signals in the defined frequency band. By using this mode, all the user-

selected carrier frequencies of the current wireless system and their field strength values can be

observed. In addition, if the Nemo Outdoor measurement system is equipped with a GPS receiver, the

position information is also stored by the system. Frequency scanning results contain the field strength

values for the carriers (and optionally location coordinates provided by GPS). The inaccuracy with a

scanner is +/- 1 - +/- 1.5 dB.

The data collected can be used, for example, for network planning and tuning and, furthermore, for

interference measurements. These results are stored into a scanning measurement file.

Pilot Mode

Nemo Outdoor Pilot mode is designed for spread spectrum scrambling code domain analysis. In this

mode, Nemo Outdoor is able to measure and decode the Pilot signal scrambling codes and their

signal-to-noise ratios (Ec/N0 values). In addition, the Primary and Secondary Synchronization Channel

Ec/N0 can be measured. Furthermore, Pilot Channel Time of Arrival and Absolute Timing (referenced

to GPS) can be observed. The complete RF signal power (RSSI) can be measured as well as the

signal code power (RSCP) for each individual scrambling code. The inaccuracy with a scanner is +/- 1

- +/- 1.5 dB.

The data collected can be used, for example, for network planning and tuning and, furthermore, for

interference measurements. These results are stored into a scanning measurement file.

SPECTRUM ANALYSIS

Nemo Outdoor with Anritsu MS2721B spectrum analyzer offers the capability to determine occupied

bandwidth and track interference sources.


DURING MEASUREMENTS

When Nemo Outdoor is performing the user defined test measurement, you can view the process in a

number of graphs, grids, and maps. The graph and grid windows are fully user configurable. In the

following chapters, the most common tasks are presented in more detail and some examples are

given to illustrate their use. If you have any problems in starting the measurements, see page 327.

The Status field in the upper right corner of the main window provides information on the

measurement process. During the measurement, you see Rec, and when you stop the measurement,

the remark Idle appears in the field.

During the measurement process, you may want to mark various measurement

circumstances/problems. If you wish to mark these points in the measurement file(s), you may insert

markers in the files. You can view the inserted marker in the Markers grid window.

You may insert as many markers as you wish. Each marker will be assigned a marker sequence

number and a marker number. The sequence number is a running number assigned automatically by

Nemo Outdoor. The marker number is assigned by pressing a number between 0 and 9 on the

keyboard. This is useful when measuring in various locations during one measurement session. You

can assign a marker number (between 0 and 9) for each suburb or street. If you are performing

measurements in one location, use the spacebar to insert markers without the marker number.

DURI NG MEASUREMENTS 105

MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS

With a Scanner

In order to measure with a scanner, just start the recording by clicking the Start Recording button.

Nemo Outdoor will start writing the measurement data in a file.

With a Mobile

To carry out frequency scanning with a mobile phone, first make sure that the terminal model supports

the scanning feature.

To do frequency scanning, select Device Commands | Start Single Shot Scanning, or Device

Commands | Start Continuous Scanning.

To end a scanning measurement, select Device Commands | Stop Scanning.

MAKING VOICE CALLS

The Scanning mode that you have selected for each of the test mobiles affects the way you can make

calls in Nemo Outdoor. In the Call mode, the software makes test calls according to the settings

defined in the script file or you can conduct manual test calls. In the Frequency Scan mode (GSM

only), making calls is not possible.

To make voice calls:

1. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, insert the phone number that you wish to

use in the test call in the Voice Number field. Click OK.

2. Select Start Voice Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu.

Alternatively, you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.

Note that after you have activated the script, you cannot control the measurement manually

until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.

3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Voice Call from the Device

Commands menu . If you are running a script, wait until the script is finished.


Voice Call Properties

Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality measurements.

Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement Settings dialog and the

Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened.

Number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number must be such

that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line.

The Number field can contain up to 17 characters.

When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo

Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do

not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must

define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If

ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to

Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires Nemo

Server version 2.5.0 or later.

Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality

settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.


Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is

compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz

sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the

Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a

maximum of 30 seconds.

Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.

Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio

sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a prefix is

defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix is the

user-defined prefix, mos the PESQ score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without

decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example:

terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.

Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The

threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold value is

5, which means that all samples are saved.

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script

Editor. See page 162 for more information on making scripts.

Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server, the delay time

between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds.

CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note that

the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.

Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. The duration timer is started from the

channel assignment. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1,000,000 seconds. Note that the

maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between

Call Attempts parameter.

Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. If the call attempt

timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel, the call attempt

will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout

values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.


Voice Call Properties – TETRA

Note that the TETRA tab is visible only if you are measuring with a TETRA mobile.

Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls. Click the Voice Number Properties

button in the Measurement Properties dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened.

Number defines the number to be called. It must be a valid phone number. The number must be such

that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line.

The Number field can contain up to 17 characters.

Call type defines what kind of calls will be made. There are five different options in TETRA networks:

duplex, semiduplex, group, direct, and PSTN.

Duplex: Normal call between two terminals; both parties can speak at the same time

Semiduplex: Call between two terminals, but only one party can speak at a time by pressing the

PTT (Press-to-Talk) button

Group: Call from one terminal to a group; all terminals having that group active can listen, and by

pressing the PTT button, also speak

Direct: Call between terminals which bypasses the network, by means of the PTT button


PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile

Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script










VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS

Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements in

GSM, WCDMA, CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA. Please refer to the Voice Quality Guide on page Error!

Bookmark not defined. for complete instructions on setting up and making voice quality

measurements. For a list of supported terminals, please see the Voice Quality data sheet.

The measurements enable the assessment of the quality of voice during voice and video calls as

perceived by end-users. The measurement is based on the ITU-T recommendation P.862.1 and P.

862.2 and it produces a PESQ score that is mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score)

scale. The Nemo Voice Quality system setup consists of Nemo Outdoor, 1-6 mobiles and audio

modules (with EVOQ) or 1-4 mobiles and audio modules (with TerraTec), and the Nemo multi rack.

In mobile-to-mobile measurements, one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test sample

in both directions. These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the

transmitting terminal and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.


In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements, a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is connected

to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option. These measurements present the downlink quality of the

terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end, the uplink quality of the terminal at the server end, and the

downlink quality of the receiving terminal.


MAKING VIDEO CALLS

Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement Settings dialog to access

the Video Call Properties dialog. These settings are needed for making video calls.

Number defines the number where the video call will be made.

When Request voice call callback is selected, the application sends callback command to Nemo

Server using DTMF tones. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do

not affect to MOS score. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must

define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. If

ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to

Nemo server, callback number is recognized automatically. Note that this functionality requires Nemo

Server version 2.5.0 or later.

Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Note that the voice quality

settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.

Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is

compared. If you want to use your own test samples, make sure that the samples are of 8KHz

sampling rate, 16-bit linear coded .wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in length. With the

Terratec sound card, sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a

maximum of 30 seconds.

Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.


Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio

sample files. If you leave this field empty, the received audio files are not stored. When a prefix is

defined, Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav where prefix is the

user-defined prefix, mos the PESQ score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without

decimal point, date in DDMMYYYY format, and time in HHMMSS format. For example:

terminal1_34_15112004_143045.wav.

Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The

threshold values range from 0-5, 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. The default threshold value is

5, which means that all samples are saved.

Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script


Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server, the delay time between a

new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds.

CDMA specific settings, Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Note that

the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile.









Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings to be

made prior to making the call. Go to Measurement Properties | General, and press the

Advanced button. In the Advanced Properties dialog, you need to select the applicable video

call method for the measurement from the drop-down menu.


Select the method based on the list below, or try each Method separately and select the one that

works. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file.

Method 1 - Samsung Z105

Method 2 - Samsung Z107

Method 3 - Samsung Z140, Samsung Z500, Samsung P920, Samsung Z560, Samsung ZX20

Method 4 - Samsung ZV10

Method 5 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile

Method 6 - Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile

Method 7 - LG KU950 , LG KF700

Method 8 - Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the terminal keypad)

Method 9 - Samsung G800

To make video calls and video quality calls:

1. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, insert the phone number that you wish to

use in the test call in the Video Number field. Click OK.

2. Select Make Video Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu.

Alternatively, you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.


until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.


Note that video quality parameters are supported only with certain Motorola test terminals.

3. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode, select Stop Video Call. If you are running a

script, wait until the script is finished.

Note! Video call testing is supported on any video call – capable terminal based on Qualcomm

chipset. However, the user must remember to select the correct method from Measurement

Properties | General | Advanced Properties prior to making the call. The selected method is

saved to the device configuration file.

Terminals verified by Anite Finland support video calls. It is possible that if the device is not

included in the list of supported terminals, the video call functionality does not work.

DATA TRANSFERS

With mobiles supporting CS and PS data, you can make data transfers. In Nemo Outdoor, you have

several data protocol options for making data transfers: you can use the Iperf for TCP/UDP, FTP,

SFTP, HTTP, HTTP Browsing, POP3, SMTP, WAP, or streaming.

The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. Each data transfer

needs to be set up and configured individually.


function in Device Settings Measurement Properties | General | Advanced prior to

performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate

.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the

measurement file under the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information


Configuring the Data Connection

Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection that is

used for the transfer. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers.

If you are making CS data transfers, see chapter Data Call Properties on page 115. If you are making

PS data transfers, see chapter Packet Session Settings on page 116.


Data Call Properties

Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. Click the Data

Number Properties button in the Measurement Properties dialog to access the Data Call Properties

dialog. There are separate views for GSM, UMTS, and CDMA. The parameters are the same. The

UMTS and CDMA views just have fewer parameters.



Number defines the number to be called of the dial-up server.

Username refers to the dial-up server username.

Password refers to the dial-up server password.

Transparent Mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS data call.

Compression defines if no compression or v.42bis compression is used.

Modem Type refers to the modem type that the dial-up server is using. The alternatives are Analog

(v.34) and ISDN (v.110 and v.120).

Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction.

Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface.

Enable Automatic Link Adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link

Adaptation (ALA). The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the best

channel coding.


Packet Session Settings

Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. Click the

Packet Session button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement Settings dialog to access the

Packet Session Settings dialog.

All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific. You must select the correct parameters to make

the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring.


TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf)

Note that it is required that Nemo Server be used with Iperf testing as the original Iperf service

is slightly modified for optimal performance.

Open the Measurement Properties dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement

Properties). Select TCP (Iperf) or UDP (Iperf) in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties

button. You can also open this dialog from the Script Editor dialog (Just click the Add button and then

choose Packet Data Transfer | TCP Packet Data Transfer…(IPerf)/UDP Packet Data

Transfer…(IPerf) from the list.


Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, each

connection must have its own IP address.

Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal, the same IP

address can be used.

Note that Firewall should be turned off.

Port refers to the port used by Nemo Server. For TCP and UDP protocols, the default port is 5001.

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection

to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time, connection attempt will

fail.

Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data, or both.

TCP window size defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission. If it is too small,

it can decrease the maximum data throughput, and if it is too high it can increase the retransmission

round-trip time (RTT). To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput, the window size should be at

least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. For example, with HSDPA with category 8 the

maximum throughput is about 7.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100 ms. To avoid reduction of the

throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7.3 Mbit/s * 0.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.25 kB.


Downlink testing (these values are indicative only):

Max. throughput ~RTT (ms) TCP window size (kbit) TCP window size (kB)

64 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 600 38.4 4.8

128 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 600 76.8 9.6

256 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 600 153.6 19.2

384kbps (Rel. 99) 200 76.8 9.6

HSDPA 1.8Mbps UE category 3 & 4

100 180 22.5


100 360 45


100 730 91.25

HSDPA 10.2Mbps UE category 9

100 1020 127.5

HSDPA 14.4Mbps UE category 9

100 1440 180

UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted. Since UDP does not

guarantee successful data transmission, it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower layers. If

higher data transmission rate is used, the packet error rate (PER) increases. For example, if lower

layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured to 400kbit/s, there

should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able to transmit successfully).

Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it limits the maximum throughput

that is not normally desired.

UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. It should be smaller than the

maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower layers.

Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and it should be

avoided. On the other hand if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the UDP and IP header

increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the result of smaller data

throughput. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little bit less than maximum

Ethernet packet size which is 1,500 bytes. A good default value for the UDP datagram size is 1,460

bytes.

Transfer duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds.

Transfer data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes; that is, the transfer finishes

when the defined amount of data has been transferred. The size of the individual data packages is

defined in the Packet Size field.

Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties dialog, the

Transfer duration option will be disabled. This is because when the Transfer data size option is

used, the transmission will end after a certain amount of data has been transferred. It is not

limited by time.

Transfer attempt timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. If the transfer

attempt timeout value is exceeded before data connection, the data connection attempt will be

stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. The range of Transfer Attempt Timeout values is

from 0 to 60 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds.


Next, click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. Click the PDP Context Properties

button.

Configuring the FTP Protocol

Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates

between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server. The server can be any standard FTP server. Current

data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The FTP module supports

firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server opens

a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some firewalls

may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data transfer

would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not

block the connection.



If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where

you are running Nemo Outdoor.

To set up data measurements using FTP

1. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and

to configure the measurement mobile.

2. Connect (page 37) and configure (page 67) the measurement devices.

3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72)

4. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 115) or PS data (page 116).

5. Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 121).

6. Create a script (optional) (page 157).

7. After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on

page 139.


FTP Transfer Properties


Properties). Select FTP in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. You can also open

the FTP Transfer Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Just click the Add button and then

choose first FTP Logon and define the settings and then choose FTP Transfer.

Host name is the IP address of the FTP server used.





If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer on

which you are running Nemo Outdoor.

Port refers to the port used by the FTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the FTP server.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the FTP server.

Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the

data transfer would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the

firewall does not block the connection. Select the Passive mode option to activate passive mode.




fail.

Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling,

SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.

Address refers to the address of the proxy.

Port refers to the port used by the proxy.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy.

Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if

there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, transfer will

fail.

Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one FTP

session.

Number of threads defines in how many threads the test file is split during an FTP transfer. For

example, the size of the downloaded file is 10MB. The number of threads is set to five. Nemo Outdoor

splits the 10MB file into five fragments with the size of 2MB each. All five FTP transfer sessions are

started simultaneously. Each thread creates a new FTP session and transfers a fragment of the file.

Total application data throughput is recorded including all threads. Resume is not supported with multi

threaded FTP transfers. In case of a data drop, all threads will start from the beginning. Multi-threaded

FTP transfer mode is supported in receive direction.

Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the FTP server. If you are receiving

data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send

for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection. Otherwise the

different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Also note that if there are several testing units using the same FTP server, we recommend that

you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt, filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for

each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file.

Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data, this

is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these files is

defined in the User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab (see page 57).

Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This functionality is available with FTP upload testing. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive

for all of them, you must define a different local file for each connection. Otherwise the different

data connections will try to write in the same file.


Configuring the SFTP Protocol

Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client, which can be used to measure data transfer rates

between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. The server can be any standard SFTP server. Current

data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. The SFTP module supports

firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Normally when a data transfer is initialized, the server opens

a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. Some firewalls

may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests, and in that case the data transfer

would fail. With passive mode, the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not

block the connection.





To set up data measurements using SFTP






5. Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 124).



page 139.


SFTP Transfer Properties


Properties). Select SFTP in the Supported Data Protocols field and click on the field. You can also

open the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Just click the Add button and

then choose first SFTP Logon and define the settings and then choose SFTP Transfer.

Host name is the IP address of the SFTP server used.







Port refers to the port used by the SFTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server.



fail.


SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.






Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.



fail.

Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one SFTP

session.

Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. If you are receiving

data, this is the source file. If you are sending data, this is the destination file.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send

for all of them, you must define a different remote file for each connection. Otherwise the

different data connections will try to write in the same file.

Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server, we recommend that

you use a unique file name extension (e.g., filename_tester1.txt, filename_tester2.txt, etc.) for

each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file.

Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. If you are receiving data, this

is the output file. If you are sending data, this is the source file. The default location for these files is


Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. This functionality is available with SFTP upload testing. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file size in kB>.bin.




Configuring the HTTP Protocol

The HTTP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP

protocol. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. In the HTTP testing, the user selects one file

that will be downloaded or uploaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is measured.



To set up data measurements using HTTP






5. Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 126).




page 139.

HTTP Transfer Properties


Properties). Select HTTP in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. You can also

open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Just click the Add button and

then choose HTTP Transfer from the list.

In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog, you can define the required data transfer settings.

Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Supported types are Tunneling,

SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.





fail.



Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received.

Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time stamp.

The number of threads can be defined by the user. Each thread transfers the entire file.

URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. For

example, http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. If you

are sending HTTP data, URL defines the destination.


Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, you must define a

different URL from different servers for each of them.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, you can use the

same URL for all of them.

If you encounter problems with the data transfer, deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are

running Nemo Outdoor.

To make consecutive transfers, create a script with several HTTP transfers. See page 140 for

instructions on making scripts.

Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. The default location for these files is







fail.

Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol

The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the

HTTP Browsing protocol. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. In HTTP testing, the user

selects one URL address that will be downloaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is

measured.

To set up data measurements using HTTP





4. Configure the data connection for CS data or PS data (page 116).

5. Define browser transfer -related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog (page 126).



page 139.


Browser Transfer Properties


Properties). Select Browsing in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. You can

also open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Just click the Add

button and then choose Browser Transfer from the list.

URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be downloaded. For example,

http://www.yourcompany.com/testbrowser.htm.


there is a break in the data flow. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time, the transfer

will fail.

If Decode Content Information is selected, information about the images, texts and links are written

to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information.

Close Window After Transfer closes the browser window after the data transfer.


The downloaded page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to download the whole

page is written to the measurement file. The cache and cookies information is cleared after every

download. PPP and RLC layer data throughputs are logged during the browser testing. The average

PPP and RLC data throughputs are also available. Average results are calculated from the time PDP

context was active (PAC- PAD). The connection setup time and the download time can be seen in

Nemo Outdoor or calculated with Nemo Analyze

For MULTI browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server be used

for multiple simultaneous data connections, e.g. for benchmarking purposes as EACH

CONNECTION MUST HAVE ITS OWN IP ADDRESS.



Configuring the POP3 Protocol

POP3 and SMTP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor

how the message is transferred. POP3 protocol is used for receiving emails and SMTP protocol for

sending emails.



To set up data measurements using POP3






5. Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings dialog (page 130). Also define the test e-mails

that are used in the measurement.



page 139.


E-Mail Settings Dialog – POP3 Settings


Properties). Select POP3 in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. You can also

open the E-Mail Settings dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Just click the Add button and then

choose E-Mail Testing | POP3 | Connect and Receive E-Mails from the list.

POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements.

Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server.



Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same IP


Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the POP3 server.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the POP3 server.



fail.

Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.


SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.






POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor.



fail.

Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received

from the e-mail server.

Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. This will save

disk space.

The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog.

Configuring the SMTP Protocol

POP3 and SMTP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor

how the message is transferred. POP3 protocol is used for receiving emails and SMTP protocol for

sending emails.



To set up data measurements using SMTP




3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72). Also define

the test e-mails that are used in the measurement.


5. Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings dialog (page 132).



page 139.


E-Mail Settings Dialog – SMTP Settings


Properties). Select SMTP in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. You can also

open the E-Mail Settings dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Just click the Add button and then

choose E-Mail Testing | SMTP | Connect and Receive E-Mails from the list.

SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements.

Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its

own IP address.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same IP


Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own. Therefore, it

is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those operators' SIM cards.

Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server.

In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SMTP server.

In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SMTP server.




fail.

Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements.


SOCKS4, and SOCKS5.







fail.

Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test. Click the Edit button to open

the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the message. See page

134 for more information on the E-Mail Editor.


E-Mail Editor

Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test

messages and save messages for later use.

New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor.

Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail messages.

Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use.

Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use.

Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.

Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail.

Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.

Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message.


Configuring the WAP Protocol

The WAP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the WAP

protocol. The WAP protocol is used, for example, in web browsing. In the WAP testing, the user

selects one file that will be downloaded through the WAP protocol and this data transfer is measured.



To set up data measurements using WAP





the test files that are used in the measurement.


5. Define WAP Gateway settings in the WAP Transfer Properties dialog (page 135).


After you have completed the setup, you can start the actual data transfer. See instructions on page

139.

WAP Transfer Properties


Properties). Select WAP in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. You can also

open the WAP Transfer Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Just click the Add button and

then choose WAP Transfer from the list.

WAP transfer properties define settings for the WAP gateway used in the measurements.

WAP gateway host defines a name or an IP address for the WAP gateway. Note that if you have

multiple simultaneous data connections, each connection must have its own IP address.


WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway.



fail.



fail.

URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded. For example,

http://www.yourcompany.com/testfile.htm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals, you must

define a different URL from different servers for each of them.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal, the same

URL can be used.



To make consecutive downloads, create a script with several WAP transfers. See page 140 for

instructions on making scripts.

Local file defines the output file and location for WAP testing. The default location for these files is





Configuring the Streaming Protocol

The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the

streaming protocol. The streaming protocol is used, for example, in video streaming. In the streaming

testing, the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the streaming protocol and this data

transfer is measured.



Note that in order to make streaming measurements, you need to have RealPlayer installed on

the computer. You can download a free player from the www.real.com website.

Note that to make video streaming quality measurements, IP packet capturing must be enabled.

Refer to page 157 for more information.

To set up data measurements using streaming:








5. Define Streaming properties (page 137).



page 139.

Streaming Properties


Properties). Select Streaming in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. You can

also open the Streaming Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Just click the Add button

and then choose Streaming from the list.

Note that if Streaming is not available in the Data Protocol field, RealPlayer is not installed on

the computer. You can download a free player from the www.real.com website.

URL defines the IP address of the video file that will be streamed. For example,

rtsp://yourcompany.com/testfile.rm. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. Note that if you have

multiple simultaneous data connections, you must define a different URL from different servers for

each of them. To make consecutive downloads, create a script with several streaming sessions. See

page 140 for instructions on making scripts.



fail.



fail.

Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the streaming.

Select the Streaming quality option to activate streaming video quality measurements.


Select the Save sample file option and type a name in the Local file field to save the video clip used

in the measurement.

Configuring the Trace Route Protocol

By conducting Trace Route testing functionality, you can trace the servers pinged along the way to the

target server.

Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections. The ping

utility tests responsiveness between two hosts, etc. With ping trace route testing it is also possible to

check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to another. In case the network

does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route testing, it is possible to show the

location right before the host that is not responding.



To set up data measurements using the Trace Route Protocol







5. See below how to define Trace Route properties.



page 139.


Trace Route Properties

The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route

measurement, for example, www.anite.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just

make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals, each

connection must be given its own, separate IP address!


address can be used!



Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation.

HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete.

HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target server.

By selecting the Resolve host names item, the names of the pinged servers will be reported by Nemo

Outdoor.

Making Data Transfers

After you have configured the data connection (CS or PS data) and selected and configured the data

protocol (Iperf (TCP/UDP), FTP, SFTP, HTTP, Browsing, POP3, SMTP, WAP, or streaming), you can

start making the data transfers.

Note! Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers.

To make data transfers:

1. Activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.


until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Scripts button.


2. If you are not using a script, you need to start and stop the measurement manually.

CS Data:

Select Start Data Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. Wait

until the call is connected and dial-up connection established.

PS Data:

Select Activate PDP Context from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement

menu. Nemo Outdoor will automatically make the GPRS attach. Wait until the PDP context is

activated and dial-up connection established.

3. Select Start Data Transfer from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu.

4. When you want to stop the data transfer, select Stop Data Transfer.

STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING

Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the

network. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. Nemo Outdoor supports Psytechnics

PVI streaming video quality testing, and measures video quality type, jitter, packet error rate, and

MOS. A video preview can also be seen during the measurement in Nemo Outdoor. Note that it is only

possible to make single video quality measurements, so multi measurements are not possible.

In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements, you will need to install RealPlayer

10 or 11 and Apple QuickTime 7.2 player on the computer, and to define streaming video settings in

the Streaming Properties dialog (see page 137).

Making streaming video quality measurements:

1. Check that RealPlayer and Apple QuickTime 7.2 player are installed on the computer.

2. Define the video streaming settings in the Streaming Properties dialog (see page 137).

3. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . From the Measurement menu, select

All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test devices or <device

name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with just one device.

4. You can view, for example, from a line graph some streaming parameters. Open a line graph (Data

| Line Graph | New). Press the Add New Layer button and select Video Quality MOS in the Y

field and click OK. The graph will now display the selected parameter.

5. From the Measurement menu, select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer or wait

until the entire video clip has been streamed.


VOIP CALLS With the optional VoIP module combined to Nemo Outdoor, a user is able to perform IP telephony measurements on the IP networks based on the established VoIP sessions.

In order to be able to make VoIP call measurements, you will need to install a SIP server. Nemo

Outdoor VoIP system is compatible with Asterisk SIP Server. To find more information on installing the

Asterisk SIP server, login to http://www.asterisk.org/applications/pbx

To start making VoIP call measurements, you will need to define some VoIP session settings in the

SIP Server Settings and VoIP call configurations dialogs. Open the SIP Server Settings dialog by

selecting the Enable VoIP Measurements option in the Measurement Settings tab from the

Measurement Properties dialog. Click the SIP Server button in the Measurement Settings tab

(Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Settings).

Domain defines the address of the SIP server, e.g. pbx.nemo.fi.

Port defines the SIP port. The default SIP port is 5060.

Username/Password defines the username that the user has registered to the server and the corresponding password.

Connection timeout defines the timeout while trying to connect to the server.

Registration duration defines the duration for which the SIP registration is valid.

Automatic registration, when selected, automatically registers the user to the SIP server (as soon as Packet Session has been created).

When selected, Use SIP proxy option enables the user to send outbound SIP messager via Proxy. Proxy address/port defines the proxy, through which SIP messages are sent.

Open the VoIP Call Configuration dialog by clicking the VoIP Call button in the Measurement

Settings tab (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Settings).


SIP callee address defines the SIP address of the call receiver.

Audio codecs for the call can be selected from the list by selecting the box next to them. The order of

the codecs is significant since the first codec is offered as the primary codec when making a call to a

counterparty. For example, in the image above the primary codec offered for an outgoing call is

G729/8000. In addition, only selected codecs are used while negotiating the codec in the case of an

incoming call.

Script settings defines the duration of the call and the call attempt timeout in seconds.

Making VoIP measurements:

1. Enable VoIP Measurements option in the Measurement Settings tab from the Measurement

Properties dialog and define SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configurations.

2. To start packet session, click on the Device Commands button | Start Packet Session.

3. To register SIP server, click on the Device Commands button | Register SIP Server.

4. To start VoIP measurement, click on the Device Command button | Start VoIP Call.

5. To end VoIP measurement, click on the Device Command button | Stop VoIP Call.

6. Finally, to unregister SIP server, click on the Device Command button | Unregister SIP Server

(Note: This is not a mandatory step, a new call can be made without unregistering)


SMS TESTING

SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. Open the SMS

Testing dialog by clicking the Short Messaging Service button in the Measurement Properties,

Measurement Settings tab (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties |

Measurement Settings tab).

Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages. Enter

the number without spaces and with the international country code; for example, +3581234567.

Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the messages

are sent. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings.

Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated.

When the End-to-end message option is selected, a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is added

to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. When the measurement file is added to

the Nemo Analyze database, Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the time it took for it to

reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing.

All handlers support sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages.

Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. The limit is set to 15000 characters.


SMS Testing with CDMA terminals

Note that the SMS testing functionality may depend on your terminal's software version. See

the applicable datasheet for further information.

SMS testing with CDMA does not require you to do any configurations prior to SMS testing for the

terminal. The verified CDMA terminals supporting SMS testing include LG C680, LG C676, LG KX206,

LG KX256, LG VX8100, LG VX8350, and LG LHD-200E. The testing goes as follows.

1. Connect and add the terminal to Nemo Outdoor.

2. Prior to starting SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, send an SMS to the target phone number from the

phone’s keypad.

3. Go to Nemo Outdoor, and click on the Device Commands button | Send SMS Message. Nemo

Outdoor sends the same message as was sent by the user from the actual phone interface by

retrieving the text message from the phone’s Saved messages folder.

Making SMS testing measurements:

Note that with CDMA terminals, before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor, you must

send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. After that Nemo Outdoor

can be used to send the same message again.

1. Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces) where you are

sending the test SMS message.

2. Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the test SMS.

The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings.

3. Define the Timeout, i.e., the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated.

4. Type in the test message and click OK.

5. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . From the Measurement menu, select

All Devices | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with all test devices or <device name> | Send

SMS Message to send an SMS with just one device. Nemo Outdoor will send the test SMS.

6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully.

Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on

the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all selections and select the Short

Message Service item and click OK. The grid will now display only the selected SMS testing-

related events.


MMS TESTING

MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network. MMS

messages can be sent manually and with scripts. In addition to successfully sent/received MMS

messages, also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures are recorded enabling

statistical success rate calculations. Nemo Outdoor measures total MMS sending delay. Also separate

delays from Attach, PDP context activation, logging to MMSC, and message sending/receiving are

recorded.

In order to be able to make MMS measurements, you will need to define some MMS-related settings

in the PDP Context Settings dialog.

If you are using the Nokia 6630, 6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing, please see page 148. Some

special MMS settings are required.

Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements, the script must not

contain a PDP activation command.


Packet Session Settings for MMS

Open the Packet Session Settings dialog for MMS by clicking the Multimedia Messaging Service

button in the Measurement Properties, Measurement Settings dialog (Measurement | <device name>

| Measurement Properties | Measurement Settings). The MMS tab is opened by default.

MMS

In the MMS tab, all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements.

MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. This setting is operator-specific.

MMSC username defines the MMS Service Center username. This setting is operator-specific.

MMSC password defines the MMS Service Center password. This setting is operator-specific.

WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. This setting is operator-specific.

WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. This setting is operator-specific.

Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is terminated.

Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is terminated.

Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement.

Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages.


Packet Session

Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. All the

parameters in this tab and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator specific. You must

select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of the

network that you are measuring.

MMS Editor

Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. You can attach files to the test messages

and save messages for later use.

New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor.

Open MMS Message opens an Open dialog where you can open premade MMS messages.

Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use.

Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use.

Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location.

Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message.

Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.

Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message.


Making MMS Measurements

Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements.

You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated.

If you are using the Nokia 6630, 6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing, please see page 148. Some

special MMS settings are required.

Making MMS measurements:

1. Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (p.146).

2. Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor (p.147).

3. If you want to make automated measurements, create a script for MMS measurements (p.140).

4. If you are making manual measurements, that is, not using a script, select Send MMS Message

from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. Nemo Outdoor will send

the test MMS.

5. If you are using a script, activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. This will start

the measurement.

6. You can view, for example, from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully.

Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the

grid and select Properties from the popup menu). Clear all selections and select the Multimedia

Message Service item and click OK. The grid will now display only the selected MMS testing-

related events.

MMS Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80

You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80 mobiles before you can use

them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor.

Changing MMS settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80:

1. On the phone main window, press Messag.


2. In the Messaging view, press Options.

3. From the menu, select Settings.

4. From the Settings view, select Multimedia message.


5. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.

6. Select the Recept. in home net. and change it to Off.

7. Select the Reception if roaming option and change it to Off.

8. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile on and off.


MMS Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121

You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles before you can use

them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor.

Changing MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121:

1. On the phone main window, press Messaging.

2. In the Messaging view, press Options.


3. From the menu, select Settings.

4. From the Settings view, select Multimedia message.

5. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.


6. Select Multimedia retrieval and change it to Off.

7. Select Allow anon. msgs. and change it to Off by pressing the navigation button on the phone, or

by selecting Options| Change| No.

8. Press on the navigation key to change the setting for Receive adverts from Yes to No.


9. Press the navigation button on the phone to change the Receive report setting from Yes to No.

10. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile off and on.

START EXTERNAL APPLICATION

This feature allows users to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the

automatic measurement sequence. You can define the executable as well as the command-line

parameters. The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications

that are not built into Nemo Outdoor. This enables, for example, the testing of data protocols that are

not currently supported by Nemo Outdoor. You can then monitor the data throughputs from the PPP

data throughput parameter.

The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. An APP event is written to the

log file when a web browser is launched and closed. The user must set the cache size to minimum

from the browser settings.

The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor, Add menu. Select Start

External Application from the menu.


Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while making

measurements. Define the path where the application .exe file is located on your computer. For

example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox.exe.

If you select the Wait until completed option, the test script will be on hold until the external

application is closed.

Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is started.

For example, if you start Internet Explorer, define here a URL (http://www.anite.com/nemo). You can

also leave the field empty. Note that there should be no spaces between the characters in the

pathname or target file specified in the Arguments field.

Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files. For example,

C:\Temp.

ICMP PING

The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping

measurements simultaneously with data transfers.

Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged, for example, www.anite.com. You

can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to

the ping.

Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time. The value determines the

size of the packet sent to the server. In addition, it determines the size of the reply packet that the

server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor.

Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the server. If

this time is exceeded, the ping measurement event will be created by using the timeout parameter

(=-1).

Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds. In addition to the duration, also define where the

delay will occur. The options are:


Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before sending

new request. If the delay is less than the ping delay, a new request is sent immediately after

the reply.

Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received.

Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping

measurement is repeated.

Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until you

stop it manually.

Example 1. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 1 s. New request is sent

every 1.1s (100ms + 1000ms). If “delay between request” is selected, a new request is sent every

1000ms.

Example 2. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 50ms. New request is sent

every 150ms (100ms + 50ms). If “delay between request” is selected, a new request is sent every

100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request.

To make ping measurements:

1. Open the Ping Settings dialog (Measurement Properties | Measurement Settings | Supported

Data Protocols | ICMP Ping).

2. Define the required ping parameters and click OK. Close the Measurement Properties dialog.

3. Click the Start Recording button .

4. From the Device Commands menu , select Activate PDP Context. Wait until the status field in

the Device Info window says ‘PDP Context Activated’.

5. From the Device Commands menu, select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the Ping until

stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog, select Stop ICMP Ping to stop the ping measurement.

Otherwise, the ping will be repeated the user-defined number of times.


IP PACKET CAPTURING

Note that the Microsoft Network Manager needs to be installed on your computer BEFORE

installing Nemo Outdoor! If you do not select this option, it will NOT be POSSIBLE to install

Network Manager after Nemo Outdoor installation.

With IP packet capturing, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and can

be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal®. A separate log file is generated for

each test terminal making data transfers.

In order to use IP packet capturing in Nemo Outdoor, you must configure a dial-up connection (see the

Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for more information) and install the Network Monitor driver for the

dial-up connection.

After setting up the dial-up connection, go to Microsoft website at

<http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=f4db40af-1e08-4a21-a26b-

ec2f4dc4190d&displaylang=en> to download the free Network Monitor installation package. Select the

NM32_x86_setup.exe installation file and click on Download.

1. Once the installation file is downloaded, double-click on it. The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.2

dialog appears. Click Yes to continue installation.


2. Click Next in the Welcome dialog.

3. In the End-User License Agreement dialog select I accept the terms in the License

Agreement option, and click Next.


4. It is recommended to select the Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates

(recommended) option. Click Next to continue with installation.

5. Select Typical in the Choose Setup Type dialog that appears.


6. Click Install in the Ready to install dialog.

7. Click Finish in the Completing the Setup Wizard dialog.

8. Next, install Nemo Outdoor.

9. Start Nemo Outdoor, add a device, and go to the Measurement Properties, General page.

Click the Advanced button. In the Advanced Properties dialog, select the Enable IP

Capture option.


Note that if the Enable IP Capture item is not on the list, the Network Monitor driver is not

installed.

The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP

capturing is enabled.


function prior to performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture

field. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This file needs to accompany

the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information


Performing IP Packet Capturing:

Network Monitor needs to be installed prior to installing Nemo Outdoor for IP packet capturing

to show in Nemo Outdoor.

1. Set up a dial-up connection (see Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions).

2. In Nemo Outdoor, enable IP capturing in the Advanced Properties dialog.

3. IP packet capturing data is stored in a separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal and the

data can be analyzed with Ethereal.


MAKING SCRIPT FILES

Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners.

The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. The extension for all

Script files is .nsf. You can edit the Script file configuration in the Script Editor dialog. You can access

this dialog by opening the Configuration Manager window, choosing the Script item, and clicking the

Add button . You can also open the same dialog by double-clicking the Script item or by right-

clicking on the item and choosing Add from the consequently opened popup menu. The Script Editor

dialog can also be opened by clicking the Script Editor button in the Measurement Properties,

Script dialog.

The table in the middle shows a list of all the functions and parameters that will be executed during a

measurement.

You can choose any of the items in the list that opens when you click the Add button. The selected

item is added to the script. See the following chapter for an explanation of the different items under the

Add button.

Modify can be used to edit an existing script entry. Select a row from the table and click the button to

change the settings for that function.

Delete deletes the selected entry row.

Move Up moves the selected entry row up by one row in the script.

Move Down moves the selected entry down by one row in the script.

Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script.

Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the measurements.

The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10,000.


When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected, the settings that have been

configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings. For example, if you

have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties – Configuration dialog, that number is

used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice Call Properties dialog does not appear.

New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values.

Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed.

Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one, opens a dialog for inserting the

file name.

Close exits the dialog.

Notes about script functions:

Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the IF loop

Examples of conditions:

o “Is different”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm

Whenever the value is other than -70dBm, IF condition is triggered

o “Is changed”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed

Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes, the IF condition is triggered.

The reference value is unknown, which means that when starting the measurement

and when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received, the IF condition is triggered.

The next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value is different from the previous

value. For example,

1. Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm triggers the IF string

2. Carrier RSSI value -70dBm nothing happens

3. Carrier RSSI value -68dBm Triggers the IF string


Script Transfer Stop Commands

With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command. For example, a data

transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes, instead of waiting for its completion. It is also

possible to set a time duration for data transfers. If a data transfer is not completed during a user-

defined time, the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data transfer automatically. Please note that

in this case the data disconnection status is written as Normal data disconnect.

The forced stop command, e.g., with voice calls, can be used in conjunction with conditional or wait

commands as well. For example, if a call should be stopped when the system changes from GSM to

UMTS, the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after the system changes.

In the example below, the voice call is started only when the serving system is GSM. Call duration is

set to 120 seconds. It should be noted that the actual call duration is set with line three, Wait until

system is UMTS but at most 120s. After the call is connected, the script starts waiting for the system

to be changed to UMTS, or at most 120 seconds. The call is ended with End a voice call (forced)

with line 4 after 120 seconds, or when system changes to UMTS; whichever comes first.

GSM voice call example. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system changes to UMTS.


The forced stop command can be used also to stop active data transfers. In the example below the

script waits until the system changes to UMTS. Once the system is in UMTS, the script waits 5

seconds before making a voice call followed by PDP context activation and FTP data transfer. The

script stops, waiting until the system changes to GSM, but at most for 60 seconds. If the system

changes to GSM before 60 seconds, the voice call is continued normally until a 60-second call

duration is reached. FTP data transfer is aborted immediately when the system changes to GSM, or

after 60 seconds, whichever comes first. If line eight were End a voice call (forced), the voice call

would be stopped immediately after inter-RAT handover occurred.

In the following you will see a PS data and voice call example. The data transfer is aborted when the

system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds; voice call is continued. The call duration is 60 seconds.


In the following you will see another PS data and voice call example. The data transfer and voice call

are aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, whichever comes first.

The voice call is aborted when the system changes to GSM, or after 60 seconds, but data transfer is

continued normally with the Stop FTP transfer (Normal) command.


Add Menu

The Add menu contains all the items that can be used in a script. Selecting an item may open a dialog

where you need to define some parameters and settings. See earlier chapters for more detailed

information on the dialogs. The Start External Application item is described in more detail on page

148.


In the Script Editor, by clicking Add and selecting Send DTMF Characters you are able to send

DTMF sequences. You can e.g. make calls to service numbers that work by using DTMF tones. This

command can only be used during voice calls.

Wait Settings

To add pauses in the script, select Wait. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different

conditions for the wait.

With the Wait until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script continues.


With the Wait for all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization points

inside the script file. Nemo Outdoor’s script group functionality enables you to synchronize the script

files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. Both synchronization methods can be

used together or separately depending on needs of the user.

In the following example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. The idea is to start FTP

download simultaneously. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is different.

Wait for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the Wait settings

dialog. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices.

Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called “PS data”.

Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be

synchronized. In this example, it is not necessary to use the script group. As many synchronization

points as needed can be added to the script files. It should be noted that the number of

synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be equal.

With the Current time option you can define a pause between items in the script. For example, you

can set a 10 second pause after a voice call is finished and before the next call starts.

With the Last notification option you can define a wait period after certain event notifications. For

example, you can make the script pause for 60 seconds after a call attempt event. This will prevent

the script from continuing before the call attempt has completed.

Note that also custom-made notifications can be selected here.


With the Next notification option you can make the script wait for a certain event notification to

appear. For example, you can make the script wait until the system changes from GSM to UMTS.

The until: Current system option enables you to define that the script file continues only when the

system selected from the drop-down menu is in use.

But at most value is the maximum wait time in seconds if the defined notification does not appear.

Adding a pause in the script file:

1. First define the wait time in seconds.

2. Then define from which point onwards the wait time is calculated: from the current time or after a

certain event notification, such as, call attempt.

3. If you selected the Last notification or Next notification option, define also the maximum wait time in

seconds after which the script will continue.


Advanced

Conditional Blocks

By selecting Advanced | If/End If, you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog. Here you can

define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If - End If block in the script

takes place. If the criteria set in this dialog are met, Outdoor will perform the set of commands within

the If - End If block, and if the criteria are not met, this set of commands will be skipped altogether and

the script resumes from the first item after the End If command.

Click on the Field tab to select a system and a parameter from the drop-down menu. In the Condition

and Value fields you can define the value conditions for the parameter which have to be met for the

commands inside the If-End If block to take place. In this example the serving system must be UMTS

FDD. You can select the system in the Value drop-down menu. Click Add to list to add the condition

to the list. If you want to remove the condition from the list, select it and click Remove. Click OK.

Next, add commands to the script from the Add menu, and move them to their appropriate places with

the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the following example script, Serving sys.=5 on the fourth row

in the Parameters field indicates the criteria that were set earlier. If the criteria are met, the commands

between the If Condition and End If commands will be performed.


Loops

You can add loops in the script files. By going to Add | Advanced | Loop/End Loop, you will enter the

Loop Settings dialog.

You can select from the following loop options:

Repeat the loop x times


Repeat the loop for x minutes

Repeat the loop until the time is x

Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met

With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set conditions for

the loop to take place. Click the Field button to select a parameter. Then define the condition and

value for the selected parameter. Finally click Add to list and OK to add the loop in the script.

In the first example, the loop has been set to be repeated twice before continuing with the script. Click

OK and add the wanted script commands in the script from the Add menu. You can move the

commands to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the example below

the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing with the script.


The second loop option allows the user to define criteria which need to be met for the loop to be

repeated. In the example below the system and parameter (UMTS | Ec/N0 (Active)) have been

selected from the Field drop-down menu. The condition for the loop is that the parameter value needs

to be greater or equal to -5. Click Add to list and OK. The commands inside the loop block will be

performed only and as long as the Ec/N0 (Active) value is greater or equal to -5.

In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long as the

call is connected to UMTS. As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM, the call stops.


Running Scripts

After you have created a script, it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on.

To run the script file:

1. In the Measurement Properties, Scripts dialog, select the script in the Script File field. Note that

you need to define the script for each device individually. The script can be different for each

device.

2. Activate the Start/Stop Scripts (F8) button . Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement

according to the script file. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts Automatically option in

the User Interface Properties, General dialog (see p.54), Nemo Outdoor will start running the

script when you click the Start Recording button.

3. The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file. After the script is

finished, you can stop the recording (Measurement | Stop or Stop button ).


MEASUREMENT LISTS

Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices combining

multiple scripts. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several scripts one after

another. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. You can also use measurement lists in idle

mode.

In Online mode, select Measurement | Start Measurement List to open the Measurement List

dialog.

Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the measurement

list is started. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file. Click Add New to add new

measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list. Click Load to load

measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists. By default, measurement list files (*.nmix) are

saved to Configuration files folder.

Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day

hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below.

For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last number

(%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day.

%a Abbreviated weekday name

%A Full weekday name

%b Abbreviated month name


%B Full month name

%d Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31)

%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23)

%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12)

%j Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366)

%m Month as decimal number (01 – 12)

%M Minute as decimal number (00 – 59)

%n Sequence number (1 – )

%N Sequence number (1 – )

%p Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock

%S Second as decimal number (00 – 59)

%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53)

%w Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0)

%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53)

%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99)

%Y Year with century, as decimal number

%z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings;


%Z Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings;


Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished.

Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished

running.

Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a

certain period of time. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm).

Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files

reaches a certain limit. Define the size in kilobits (KB).

Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.

Script file defines the script file used in the measurement. Click the Script Editor button to edit the

selected script.

Properties opens the Measurement Properties - Script dialog.

Start runs the measurement list.


Creating a measurement list:

1. Click the Add New button to add a new measurement.

2. Select a device from the Devices list.

3. Select a script from the Script File field. You can edit the selected script by clicking the Script

Editor button.

4. Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list.

5. Select the When all scripts are completed option. Finally, click Start.

6. The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed.

7. To save the measurement list, click Save.

FORCING FUNCTIONS

Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor user

interface. In addition to these, some terminals support more forcing features that are accessible via

the mobile keypad. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information on the forcing features

available for each terminal.

Channel Locking

This functionality is available for GSM and UMTS mobiles only.

You can lock GSM and UMTS test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the

measurement process. Note that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle

mode, you are actually locking the mobile only to the base station supporting that channel at that

moment if you make a call. As the base station can carry several channels simultaneously, the

connection can be established or handed over to another channel but not to another base station. In

other words, the channel used cannot be totally controlled by the mobile as the system will assign the

channel.

To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel:

Note that when the channel lock is activated, the Neighbor Stations window displays only

Serving Cell values.

Note that if you are using the single mode, you must keep the test mobile connected to the

power cord. If the mobile is not connected to the power cord and the program switches it off,

you must switch the mobile on manually.


1. When you have connected the measurement device, click the Device Settings button in

Device Info window of the appropriate mobile and select Channel Locking. You can also select

Measurement | <device name> | Channel Locking. The following dialog will appear on your

screen.

2. Enter the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits (it must be a

valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button. The button will remain pushed

down indicating that channel lock is activated. A red Lock indicator will appear in the Devices

window when a lock is activated.

3. Click the Unlock button in the Forcing functions | Channel locking dialog to release the channel

lock.


Band Locking

This functionality is available only with GSM mobiles.

You can use band locking if you want to compare how the network functions with different bands and

systems. Using the Band Locking dialog, you can force the mobile to use only one band or system at

a time.

You can open the Band Locking dialog by clicking the Device Settings button ( ) and choosing

Band Lock from the popup menu. The dialog below will be opened:

Choose a band or system from the list and click the Lock button. This will lock the mobile to the

band/system you have chosen. Click Close to exit the dialog. You will need to switch the mobile off

and on to activate the band lock.

A red Lock indicator will appear in the Devices window when a lock is activated.

To release the band lock, open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button. The band lock

will be released after you switch the mobile power off and on.

Always remember to switch the mobile power off and on again to activate/deactivate the band

lock.


Handover Control

This functionality is available only with SAGEM GSM mobile and certain Nokia terminals.

Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly. You do not have to wait for the

mobile to make handovers, as you can, for example, force a handover to every neighbor cell.

Start a measurement and initiate a call (Device Commands button | Start Voice Call). Open the

Handover Control dialog (Device Settings button | Handover Control). Define the channel and

handover type and click OK.

The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to force the

handover to.

The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell.

The user has three mode request commands, Normal mode, Handover forcing and Handover

suppression. If the terminal accepts the command made by the user, the corresponding button will

indicate this. If the command fails, the user is notified. It is also possible to send the same command

several times without clicking other commands (i.e. send a new Handover Forcing command with

different bias values or forced the terminal to different scr. code, or in GSM to a different channel

without first deactivating HO forcing). For example, the device can be forced to scrambling code 6.

Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code 6, the user can set a new target cell and press the

Handover forcing button again.

The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the user to define 3G offsets, i.e.

enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP, and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP)


During Normal mode, forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers normally.

The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system is GSM

or WCDMA. When the serving system is GSM, the target cell and non-target cell settings are disabled.

In case the current serving system is GSM, but the wanted target cell is in WCDMA, band locking can

be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA.


Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the user, handover mode can be

changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. Handover forcing is done by biasing target

and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP values. Therefore it is also possible to bias the current active

cell. For example, in the example below active set includes only one scrambling code. By pressing the

Handover forcing button, the terminal reports biasing Ec/N0 and RSCP values as set by the user.

When the mode is changed back to Normal mode the terminal reports unbiased values.

In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification, the terminal

active set includes scrambling code 63 with Ec/N0 value -7.6dB shown as a brown curve. Scrambling

code 6 and 255 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green. Scrambling code 6 is

selected to be a target cell.


Once the button is pressed, scrambling code number 6 is added to active set with Ec/N0 value -4.7dB.

Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB. Scrambling code 6 is seen with

Ec/N0 value -18.2dB (brown) and scrambling code 255 (green) is removed from the monitored set.

This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled. The device sends measurement reports

to the network with biased values.

Once the mode is changed back to normal, the terminal starts reporting unbiased values.


When the Handover suppression button is pressed, the terminal is not allowed to do handovers to

other cells. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with WCDMA. Biasing/

measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the moment. You can use this

feature, for example, to find the edge of a cell by stopping the handovers from taking place when

driving away from a base station.

Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to another. See

Making Scripts on page 162.


Cell Barring

This functionality is available for GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only.

With the Nemo Outdoor GSM measurement mobiles you can also access barred cells. During the

measurement you can select if you wish to access only cells that are accessible to all end users

(Accept), all cells; that is, also cells that are barred (Ignore), and only barred cells (Reverse). The Cell

Barring dialog is accessed by clicking the Device Settings button in the Device Info window of the

appropriate mobile and selecting Cell Barring. You can also select Measurement | <device name> |

Cell Barring.

CELL TESTING

The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that are locked

to a cell at a time.


Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. During the call

the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated. This is necessary since if the cell from

which the cell testing is performed is a strong one, without this call the neighbour list may remain

empty.

Test cases defines whether the user wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or both by

selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. If the user selects both, the test starts with a voice

connection attempt, and after that the test continues with the attempt to create a PDP context with the

cell. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in this dialog. For example, if Voice call is

selected, no Packet call settings are displayed

RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell, only cells stronger than the value defined

here will be included in the test

Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell, only cells that are stronger than this value will

be included in the test

Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made in the test

Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a cell if

no voice connection is formed. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor

continues to the next cell or to packet call testing

Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for the

packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell. After the

maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell

Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file

Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.

The Test results page shows the progress of the test. The green color indicates successful attempts,

and the number the number of attempts.


MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION

With Nemo Outdoor you can perform real-time missing neighbor detection. You have three options in

which to perform missing neighbor detection:

1. with a mobile terminal supporting missing neighbor detection,

2. GSM/UMTS scanner, or

3. GSM/UMTS scanner and a GSM/UMTS mobile.

Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-system cells. A terminal

sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list, whereas a scanner measures all available cells. Missing

neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with the neighbor list of the mobile.

Hence, a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in the neighbor list of the mobile at a

given time, but is detected/measured by the scanner. In mobile only missing neighbor measurements,

the mobile is able to detect also missing neighbors through the missing neighbor detection

functionality.

Missing neighbor detection with a mobile

1. Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor.

2. Go to Device Settings in the mobile’s Device Info window in Nemo Outdoor, and go to

Measurement Properties | Frequency scanning. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor

detection in the Scanning Options view. Next, click on Channel Configuration.

Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to selected


3. In the Select Channels dialog select the channels you want to scan and click Add. You can select

multiple channels by clicking on one and dragging the mouse. You can select one or more, or all

bands in the Band drop-down menu.

4. Click OK in the Select Channels and the Measurement Properties dialogs.

5. Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already, and go to

Device Commands | Start Single Shot Scanning or Start Continuous Scanning.

6. Once the selected scans have been performed, Nemo Outdoor compares the scanning results to

the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated and reports possible detected

missing neighbors.


Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile

You will need a GSM/UMTS scanner or a GSM/UMTS scanner and a GSM/UMTS mobile. If you are

performing missing neighbor detection with a scanner only, the scanner needs either of the following

options enabled: GSM Layer 3 or GSM/WCDMA decoding.

A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its neighbor list.

Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and, based on the data, reports the neighbor

channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's neighbor list. You can observe the

missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some important network parameters, such as,

Difference to Strongest, Ec/N0, and RSCP related to the missing neighbors.

Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. Configure the devices so that they are measuring

the same frequency (click the Device Settings button in the scanner’s Device Info window, select

Measurement Properties, click Channel Configuration). Select the same channels that the mobile

is measuring and click OK.

From Measurement | <device name>, select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog. The

field displays the scanner(s) used. The user can also set a minimum RX level threshold for missing

neighbor. If the measured RX level is below the threshold, the channel is not detected as a missing

neighbor. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection.

In GSM Missing Neighbor detection, the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32. However, note

that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor detection results.

Number of missing neighbors: Max. 32, default 3.

RX level: -50- -110dBm, default -95dBm


Open a bar graph, for example, with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New, click

the New Layer button and select the parameter in the Y box). The bar graph with the selected

parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s).

PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS Available for UMTS and CDMA networks, Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can be performed in

real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver. In a pilot pollution

situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure, or there is no clear

dominance for any pilots in the area. The pilot signal is used to distinguish cells in the network from

one another. Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL MEASUREMENT events, and analysis is

always active. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor’s UI. Pilot

pollution is detected when all the criterias match.

Select Device Settings | Pilot Pollution Analysis.

The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor user interface.

Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB. Pilot

pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB.


Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA): The default value is set to -12dB. Pilot

pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below -12dB.

RSCP active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm. Pilot

pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm.

RSCP (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA): The default value is set to -95dBm. Pilot

pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm

Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -6dB.

Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best

active set Ec/N0 value.

Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA): The default value is set to -6dB. Pilot

pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set

Ec/I0 value.

Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are within

the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. The pilot count includes active and

monitored sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are

detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell.

Pilot count threshold (for CDMA): The default value is set to 3. The number of cells that are within

the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Pilot count includes active and neighbor

sets. For example, pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected

within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell.

Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button .

UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone

Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called

”CELLPOLLUTION”.

The event includes the following information:

Source system

Source band

Source channel number

Pilot pollution scrambling code

Pilot pollution Ec/N0

Pilot pollution RSCP

Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)


NOTE! Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at the

moment.

Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on

earlier cell measurement events.


UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements

Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB

Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

CDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis - Mobile Phones

Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own, called

”CELLPOLLUTION”.

The event includes the following information:

Source system

Source band

Source channel number

Pilot pollution scrambling code

Pilot pollution Ec/I0

Pilot pollution RSCP

Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)

Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used)


Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen, and the results are based on

earlier cell measurement events.

CDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis - Scanners

Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB

Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value

GSM Interference Analysis

In GSM mobile communication networks, system capacity is often limited by co-channel interference.

This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency, or adjacent channel

interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving cell used by a terminal.

The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be achieved at a minimum C/I

margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference, and that the margin is -9 dB C/I for adjacent channel

interference with voice. With packet switched data connection C/I margin should be much higher.

Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel, or it can be also from out of band in some

circumstances. ETSI 05.05 requirements for the interference rejection are:

Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB

200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB




GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement and

playback with Nemo Outdoor. The user must enable interference analysis similarly, as with, e.g.

missing neighbor detection. Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal and GSM scanner

measurements and these measurements are combined together. GSM terminal continuously reports

RX level, RX quality and C/I values. With RX level and RX quality, the sub values are used to make

correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used.

In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH channel.

A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an interference situation. Once

triggering is done, the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal is measured also by a scanning

receiver. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning receiver to decode BSIC information.

Power of adjacent channels are (+/ - 1) is also measured by the scanning receiver. It should be noted

that the C/I value is not available with all test terminals in idle mode. Due to this limit interference

analysis in idle mode cannot be performed with all GSM test terminals.

During dedicated mode, RX level sub, RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are observed. C/I

value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode. For example, when

AMR speech codec is used, the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality Estimate) value to the network.

During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not valid. Please note that all test terminals

do not report C/I value. Triggering points in dedicated mode are:

RX level sub and RX quality sub, OR RX level sub and C/I

These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger interference

analysis. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available, or BCCH if no TCH

channel data is found. If frequency hopping is used, C/I average value is used. The user can define

triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Default values are:

RX Level Sub is above or equal user-defined threshold (default value -90 dBm)

RX Quality Sub is above or equal user defined threshold (default value 4)

Channel average C/I is below or equal user defined threshold (default value 10 dB)

The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file:

Terminal serving channel number

or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping

Cell ID

RX level sub


RX quality sub

C/I if available

For each terminal serving channel number X, the following data is extracted from scanner

measurements and written to terminal measurement file:

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel X

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1)

Channel number, RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1)

Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views, for example, in a

table grid and bar graph. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering cells can be

seen during the measurement and playback. Nemo Outdoor includes two predefined custom windows

for GSM interference analysis. Table grid and bar graph.


TIMESLOT TESTING This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only.

With Nemo Outdoor, it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel.

Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test Configuration dialog

will be opened.

Phone Number Used for Testing defines the test call number. This must be a valid number.

Run Test Until Completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been tested.

Note that if you select the Run Test Until Completed option, the test may continue indefinitely.

Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.

The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last.


In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to test.

Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging and therefore

cannot be accessed with mobiles. Click on the … button to enter the Select Channel dialog.

Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file

Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.

On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. Selecting timeslots will exclude them

from the test, for example, in the case they are already reserved for data testing. Green color indicates

channels and their timeslots that have been called, and the number in the slot the number of calls

made in the timeslot. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs of the selected channel and their

timeslots. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that was accessed during the previous call.

Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red. This happens, for example, if the user stops

the testing.

The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far.

Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.

When there are no more white slots left, i.e. all time slots except for the ones that were excluded from

the test by selecting them (grey), the measurement will stop on its own.


VIEWING GRAPHS

There are four types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor: line and scatter graphs, and vertical and horizontal

bar graphs. There are some pre-made custom windows of each graph type that offer easy access to

relevant network parameters. See page 321 for opening custom windows. To open an empty graph,

select Data | [graph type] | New.

It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a

parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph.


Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down

the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameter tree. After this, right-click

on the wanted parameter from the parameter tree and select the graph type in which you want the

parameter to be opened.

The Parameters view contents can be filtered using the Parameters and Windows buttons. Clear the Windows button, and all the custom windows will be hidden. Clear the Parameters button, and all parameters will be hidden.

The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next.

Graph Popup Menu

Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the

graph.


Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups

for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for

each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an

LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Save Custom Window Changes

Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

Save as New Custom Window

Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The

Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and

define the custom window groups.

Save as Image

Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

Move View To

With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See page 307

for more information on view groups.


Graph Properties

Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the Graph

Properties dialog. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button .

Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label above the bar in the graph.

Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. If you select Default, the axis

changes depending on the active layer. You can also define different parameters for the axes. This is

especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales.

Select Yes in the Hide panels in full screen mode if you want panels to disappear once you enter full

screen mode.

Autoscroll

Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the graph view scroll as the measurement

progresses.

Edit Parameters

By selecting the Edit Parameters item in the menu you will enter the Edit Parameters dialog. Select

parameters in the Parameters tree and move them to the editing table with the right arrow button .

Remove a parameter from the table by selecting it and clicking the left arrow button


You can also quickly find parameters through the filter field. Use the up and down arrow buttons

to move the parameters in the editing field.

The parameters will be shown in the Values view in the Graph side panel. This functionality is

particularly useful for viewing textual parameters.

Side Panel Right-click on a graph window and choose Side Panel from the popup menu. You can also open it by

clicking the Side Panel dialog button .

Layers

Select Layers in the popup menu to view the Layers view in the graph side panel.

Values

Select Values in the popup menu to view the Values view in the graph side panel.

Full Screen

Selecting the Full screen item in the popup menu will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

Zoom - Scatter Graph

To zoom in on a scatter graph, drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green dot

towards the corners with the red dots. To zoom out, do the same in reverse, dragging the mouse from

a red dot to a green dot.


Graph Side Panel - Layers

The layers can be dragged and dropped on some toolbar buttons. For example, a layer can be

dragged and dropped on the Remove layer button to remove the layer. The order of the layers can

also be changed by dragging them with the mouse.

The layer is now removed.


To create space in the graph side panel, you can also click on the X button in the right-hand corner of

the Layers view. To reopen the view, right-click on the graph and select Layers in the popup menu.

You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view.

Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu.


Grouping Layers

The New Group, Rename Group, Remove Group, Move Group Up, Move Group Down and

Group Similar Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. Layer groups can be

used to group parameters with the same unit and scale. Parameters in the same group will be

displayed in the same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph.

The Layers view displays all parameters added in the graph.


Righ-click on the view and select Group Similar Layers.

The parameters will be organized into groups based on the parameter unit.


Groups can be removed, renamed and moved up and down. You can also create a new group and

drag and drop parameters into the group.

New Layer The New Layer command creates a new layer.

Select a parameter in the Y or X field. You can also assign the parameter into a layer group.

Define the layer properties, such as, line style and color. See Layer Properties on page 211 for more

detailed information. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog.


Hide Layer

The Hide Layer button hides the selected layer.

Remove Layer

The Remove Layer button removes the selected layer.

Layer Properties

Click on the Layer Properties icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. The dialog can also be

accessed by double-clicking a layer in the panel. The Layer Properties dialog can be used to edit the

selected layer.

Line width defines the line thickness in pixels

Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs"

appearance) or one straight line

Sort(Y): Support for data sorting based on y-value in bar graph. Data can be sorted based on

descending or ascending order

Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled

Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque, 100 =

totally transparent)

Averaging refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line

There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line and bar

graphs. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic (algorithmic) or

fixed color set, or whether a color set based on parameter values is used. See p. 216 for more

information on graph layer color configuration.


Window size defines the number of values to be averaged

Automatic scale the minimum and maximum values of the scale are defined automatically based on

the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen

Use value scale defaults: the minimum and maximum values of the scale can be defined by the user,

so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent on the values that are displayed. Note that if

you want to select No in the drop-down menu, Automatic scale also needs to be set to No.

Minimum defines the minimum value of the scale, if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic scale is

set to Yes, this is not used

Maximum defines the maximum value of the scale if Automatic scale is set to No. If Automatic scale is

set to Yes, this is not used

Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at which the user-

defined limits for a measurement result is set. Horizontal lines help determine if the value goes below

or above the minimum and maximum values.

Depending on the parameter, it is possible to define various filters:

Channel: list of channels whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or… AND

Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, no filtering is used

Pilot: list of channels and pilots whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or…

AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or...). If the list is empty, appropriate filtering is not used so that it is

possible to filter only channels, only pilots or both

Frequency: list of frequencies whose measurement values are shown (Freq = f1 or f2 or f3 or…); if

the list is empty, no filtering is used

TopN: only N best measurement results are shown based on a defined parameter. If 0, no filtering is

used

TopN(Y): Support for best TOP-N filtering based on y-value in line and bar graphs. E.g., only the best

two values can be seen in the line or bar graph

BottomN(y): This can be done by selecting number of topN and select sorting order. E.g., below

bottom three RX levels are shown.

Some of the graph types support data tips. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar. The

data tip will display information from that point of time.

Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. Such parameters

are, for example, RACH TX Power, RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble Count. Such graphs

include also the following layer properties.

Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to display the

instantaneous values in the graph

Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph

Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency.


In the following example three RACH parameters are shown in the graph, and each of them has a

different point style.

Arrow Down/Up

The Arrow Down and Arrow Up icons will move the selected layer up or down in the graph

panel. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers

view with the mouse.


Layer Device Selection

The Layer Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. Layers can

be reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. The Layer

Device Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once instead of

using layer properties dialog for each layer separately.

Graph Side Panel – Values & Parameter

The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement

defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window. Select a layer in the Layers view, and

double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties.

If a given parameter value consists of more than one value, a separate parameter window appears.


In the example above, the Parameters view is organized into tabs to view more than one parameter

and its values. In this example the Ec/N0 (active) parameter is selected. You can also drag and drop

the Values and Parameter views inside, beside, above or below each other. For example, in the

example below the parameter view is embedded in the Values view.

In the example below all views are separate. By clicking the maximize icon at the upper right-hand

corner of a view it is possible to maximize the view. Click the exit icon at the top to close the view.

You can reopen the view by right-clicking on the graph and selecting Values.


By right-clicking on the Values view, you can access the Edit Parameters dialog (see page 203).

Graph Layer Color Configuration

Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used

with line and bar graphs, and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or parameters, as

different colors can be assigned e.g., to different channels, scrambling codes, cell ID, etc. First, add

parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree. Next, double-click on a layer in the

Layers side panel to enter the Layer Properties dialog.


If you select the Classic (algorithmic) option for coloring the graph, Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color

automatically.

If you choose Fixed color, click … to enter the Colors dialog. Define the fixed color by selecting it in

the Standard or Custom page, or define the RGB for the color. Click OK. The graph will be colored

based on the fixed color you selected.


Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set parameter and

Color set fields.

Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu, and a color set in the Color set

drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color set

parameter menu.


To edit the color set in question, click on Edit Color Set.. button. It will lead you to the Color Set

Properties dialog. Here you can edit the color set selected. See Color Set Editor on page 278 for

more information.

The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph.

In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers. Each BSIC is

presented with its own color; the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color.


Similarly, the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC numbers. All

channels with BSIC information appear in green color, and channels without BSIC information are

shown with black color.


The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers.


VIEWING GRIDS

Along with the graph windows, the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement events,

such as statistics from the current measurement, QoS parameters, Layer2 and Layer 3 messages (the

selection depends on the technology measured), and packet capture data. All events can be decoded

by double-clicking on the event row. The decoded message is displayed in a separate window.

Alternatively, you can right-click on an event row and from the popup menu select Decode Message.

To open several decoded message windows, select Decode Message in New Window option.


function in Device Settings Measurement Properties | General | Advanced prior to

performing data measurements. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. A separate

.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement, and this file needs to accompany the

measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in

Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. This requires Microsoft Network Monitor 3.3 to be

installed.

An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data | [Grid Type] | New. If you select one of the ready-

made custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo Outdoor, you need to select

which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select Device(s) to View dialog. In most

grids you only view one device in a grid at a time. Open several grid windows to view multiple devices

at the same time. However, in the Parameters grids you can view several devices simultaneously as

separate columns.

You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids. Click on the parameter and

drag it in the grid. It will be added there.

The options listed in the grid popup menu will be introduced next.


Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message

You can use the Find functionality in signaling grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its

decoded message. Select the grid view, press Ctrl + F, and type the search string in the Search

string field in the Find dialog. Depending on whether Up or Down direction is selected in the

Direction field, the event next in the time sequence will be highlighted in the grid.

Grid Popup Menu

Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the grid.

Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type.


Save As Custom Window

Right-click on a grid table and choose Save As Custom Window from the popup menu. The dialog

below is opened. You can also access this dialog from the Data menu.

You can use this dialog to save a custom window with a name. The new custom window is added

under the User Interface, Custom Windows item in the Configuration Manager dialog. Right-click on

the item to rename the custom window.

Save Changes

Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window; e.g., size,

parameters displayed, and colors.

Move View To



Automatic Scrolling

Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the measurement

progresses.

Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids

To make grids more clear, you can colorize certain events in a grid based on the event name or event

ID. Right-click on a grid, and select Configure Colors from the popup menu, or click on the

Configure Colors button in the Grid Properties dialog. The Grid Color Configuration dialog is

opened.

Note that not all events and parameters are available with all devices.

In the events Grid Color Configuration dialog select the Event name column. You can set a text

color and/or a background color for the selected events. If you want to colorize the background, select

Call events (Event name) in the Background Color Set field and select (none) in the Text Color Set

field. Alternatively, if you want to colorize only the text in the grid, select Call Events (Event name) in

the Text Color Set field from the drop-down menu and select (none) in the Background Color Set

field, as in the example below. Note that the contents of the Grid Color Configuration dialog depend

on which columns have been selected in the Grid Properties dialog.


Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog. Make sure that the color set type is string. Here

you can also add more strings to the color set through Add…


In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the string in the Text field and select the color

code for it. If you want, you can also write a description for the string text in the Description field.

Click OK in the String Properties and Color Set Properties dialogs. Finally, click OK in the Grid

Color Configuration dialog. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. Each color

corresponds to a certain type of event, defined in the Color Set Properties dialog.

Grid Color Configuration Based on Decoded Message in Grids

Messages and Events grids can be color-coded based on a string in a message’s decoded message.

In this case, you need to create a new color set in the Color Set Editor (see p.278). It is possible to

color-code both the text in the grid and the background color. While you can choose to colorize only

one of them, it is also possible to color-code both text and background. For example, you can have a

message appear in white text and blue background color. However, in that case remember to create

two new color sets for the same string, for example, Decoded Text_1 and Decoded Text_2. Below you

will see an example of how to create a color set and set it for the background color. Click Add…


In the Color Set Properties dialog type, for example, Decoded Text in the Name field. You can also

create a short name for the new color set, or write a description for it. Select string as the color set

type. Click Add… In the String Properties dialog type in the string which will determine the messages

to be colored with the new color set.


Click OK, and Close in the Color Set Editor.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. You can colorize the text color in the grid and/or

the background color. If you want to colorize only the text, select the new color set created above,

Decoded Text, in the Text Color Set field and select (none) in the Background Color Set field. In this

example the background will be color-coded, so (none) is selected in the Text Color Set field, and

Decoded Text in the Background Color Set field. Click OK.


All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be color-coded with the Decoded text color set.


Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids Based on Message Name

Messages in Events grids can also be color-coded based on the message name. You can color-code

the message text or the background color, or both. Color-coding a message based on its name is

done in the same way as color-coding a message based on a specific string in its decoded message.

However, when creating the new color set in the Color Set Editor (see p. 278) | Color Set Properties

| String Properties, you need to type the name of the message you want to color-code instead of the

string in the decoded message. Below you will see an example of two color sets made for the same

message name. Further, both the message text and background will be colorized. Click OK.

Also click OK in the Color Set Properties and Color Set Editor dialogs.


Next, right-click on the messages grid and select Configure Colors, or select Configure Colors in

the Grid Properties dialog. Select Message_2 in the Text Color Set field and Message in the

Background Color Set field. Click OK.

All messages called SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH will be color-coded with the new color sets.


Grid Color Configuration for Parameter Grids

Grids can be made clearer through colors. Open a parameters grid from Data | Parameters Grid.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog click Use

Defaults if no default color sets are shown in the Color Set field. The Clear All button inactivates the

default color sets. Note that not all parameters have default color sets assigned to them. You can

choose a color set for a selected parameter in the Text Color Set and Background Color Set drop-

down menus depending on whether you want to color the text/values or the background of the

text/values in the grid. If you want to set a color set for both text and color for the same parameter,

note that you need to use two different color sets for it.


You can also edit the default color sets by selecting a color set and clicking Edit… In the Color Set

Properties dialog you can change the default settings to the color set.


Parameters with assigned color sets are colorized according to their value. In the example below a

background of the parameter values has been color-coded. Click OK twice to exit the Grid Color

Configuration dialog.


Grid Color Configuration for Table Grids

Table grids have default color sets assigned to them. Go to Data | Table Grid | New. In the Grid

Properties dialog select a device and a parameter set to be viewed in the table grid. Click OK.

The parameters are colorized according to their default color sets. You can also edit the default color

sets. Right-click on the grid, select Configure Colors… the parameter you wish to edit, and Edit…

The Color Set Properties dialog appears where you can change the color set settings. Click OK to

exit the dialogs and go back to the table grid.


You can also view cell name information for missing neighbors when a scanner and a mobile are used

simultaneously.

Configure Filters/Quick Filter

Another method to organize Events grids is to use filters. By using filters, only the selected messages

will be displayed. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the popup menu


. The Grid Filter Configuration dialog is opened.

Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. Select the Hiding all

option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. If you would like to

view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others, select hiding all lines. If you would like

to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others, select showing all lines.

You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus button. A conditional row appears giving

you options based on which the grid filtering takes place.

It is possible to set filtering rules for message name, subchannel and decoded text. In addition, you

can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access through the Other

Parameter… item in the filter target popup menu.


The contents of the condition menu vary depending on which item in the filter target menu is selected.

Note also that a separate, independent condition needs to be added from the plus icon at the top

left-hand corner of the dialog. If a condition has two or more constituents, the plus icon next to the

first constituent needs to be clicked. In this case the conditions are indented and combined with one

another with the text and if, and both conditions need to be met for the filtering to take place.

In the example above, a line is filtered out if a message contains a missing neighbor ec/n0 value that

is less than -5. The second filtering rule states that if a message name contains the text

SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH and if a message contains SysInfoType18, the message is filtered

out from the grid.


The minus icon removes a row next to it from the list. Alternatively, you can delete all filters by right-

clicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup menu.

The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. Right-click on a row in the

grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu.

You can now quickly define a filter for the selected layer message. You can choose to hide the

respective message and all similar messages either according to the Event (Hide this Event),

subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the message text (Hide This Message). All

messages with the selected event, subchannel name or message text will be hidden. In the same way,

you can choose to display messages of the selected type only. Select Remove All Filters to delete all

filter rules.

When filtering is enabled, the text Filtering will appear in the title bar.

Decode Message

This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. You can also decode messages by

double-clicking on the message row.

In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message and Show Previous

Message grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message. If you move forward or back

in the message decoding grid, use the Go to Message button to move to the same message in the

messages grid. Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the contents of the message decoding

grid as text to clipboard.

With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS), it is also possible to arrange the contents

of the decoded message in three different ways.


The Format as list arranges the contents of a grid’s measurement results in a list. The Format as

horizontal table arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with columns, and the

Format as vertical table arranges the contents in a vertical table. The search field in the decoded

text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window.

Select a string of text in the decoded text, right-click on it and select Copy to copy the selected text as

text to the clipboard. If no text is selected in the decoded text window, all text in it will be copied. This

is the same as the Copy to Clipboard functionality.


Decode Message in New Window

This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time.

Automatic Decode

The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or latest

message in decoded form.

Save - Grid

The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (.txt). If you select the

Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is saved in a text file. You can also save the entire grid

window as an image file (.jpg). From Events grids, you can export data into a MapInfo Tab-File or into

a CSV file.

MapInfo Tab-File Export

You can export measurement data into a MapInfo .tab file. In an Events grid, select Save | MapInfo

Tab-File.

The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters that can be exported. Select the

parameters that you would like to include in the .tab file. Also define a File name and Layer title for

the exported .tab file.


To change the symbol for each parameter, double-click the parameter or select a parameter and click

the Change Symbol button. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo. In the Symbol Style

dialog, you can select the symbol and define some effects and background color for it. Finally click

OK.

Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the .tab file.

CSV File Export

You can export measurement data into a CSV file. In an Events grid, select Save | CSV File..


The exporting is supported for a single file, and the column separator can be a comma, semicolon, tab

or space. The file(s) can be opened with third-party applications. Indoor files are not supported at the

moment. The user can select all events or only specific events from the grid for export.

Copy

The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application as text

or as decoded text. If you select the Decoded Text option, the decoded event text is copied on the

clipboard. You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to another application.

Select All

Through the Select All item you can select all events in an Events grid. This presents an easy and

quick way to select all lines, for example, to be exported.

Find

The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid.

Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. Define if the search results should match

case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. You can also limit the search to

decoded messages only. The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one. To move down to the

next match, press F3. To move up to the next match, press Shift+F3.


The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message

window.

Below you will see a list of commands for the decoded text view.

Ctrl + Shift + F = Go to search field in decoded text view

Enter = Highlight next match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)

Shift + Enter = Highlight previous match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)

Esc = Clear search field in decoded text view (when search field is focused)

Add/Remove Separator

The Add/Remove Separator option is relevant only with parameters and Statistics grids. Right-click

on a grid table and choose Add/Remove Separator from the popup menu. You can choose a statistic

or a parameter and add an open space (a separator) above it by first clicking it and then choosing the

Add Separator option from the popup menu. You can remove the separator by clicking the open space

and choosing Remove Separator from the popup menu.

Full Screen

The Full Screen item enables you to view Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.


Grid Properties

Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. The Grid Properties dialog is

opened.

Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the grid type

and on the measurement device.

You can select the events, parameters, and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. The

available parameters are organized by technology and call mode in the All tab. If you select, for

example, the UMTS option, all the parameters under UMTS are selected. You can also select

individual parameters. Expand the branch by double-clicking on the main item (GSM, UMTS, Voice,

etc.). Select the parameters that you would like to view in the grid and click OK. In the Selected tab

you can view which parameters you have selected and change their order using the arrow buttons.

Click the Configure Colors button to access the Grid Color Configuration dialog.


User Parameters

The User Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will be

automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Info window or in graphs. Click the User

Parameters button in the Parameters dialog to access the Layer Parameters dialog.

Click the Add button to define new parameters.

Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be decoded.

Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages, for example, Ordered

MS power level.

Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched.

After you have defined all the parameters, click OK. The new parameter is added to the list in the

Layer Parameters dialog. Click OK to exit the dialog. In the Parameters dialog, expand the User

Parameters item. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK.


The list of user parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters.xml.

User Parameters can be searched in messages grids. The user can also perform more complex

searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data. It is possible, for example, to

search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message.


Exporting/Importing User Parameters

Exporting user parameters

It is possible to export and import user parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor.

1. To export user parameters, go to File | Export Settings in Nemo Outdoor. Save the .aex file on

your PC. The exported parameters will be saved on this file.

2. Next, the Export Settings dialog appears. Scroll to the User Parameters folder. The user

parameters previously created are listed under the folder. Select the ones you wish to export, and

click OK. You can also select other items to be exported in the dialog.


3. The selected user parameters and possible other items that you selected in the Export Settings

dialog are now saved in the .aex file that you saved earlier.

Importing user parameters

1. To import user parameters, select File | Import Settings in Nemo Outdoor.

2. Select the user parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.


3. Click OK. The user parameters are now saved and are shown in the Nemo Outdoor parameter

tree under User Parameters. If there already is a user parameter with the same name saved, the

imported user parameter will replace it.

VIEWING MAPS

Open a map by selecting Data | Map | New. Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have

entered in the Default Map field in the User Interface Properties dialog, Paths tab. The map window

specific commands can be accessed through toolbar buttons as well as from the popup menu when

right-clicking on the map. See page 336 for a description of the Nemo Outdoor map toolbar buttons.

Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. For information on Indoor

measurements, refer to page 286.

It is possible to view selected parameters in map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a

parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Parameters can also be opened

for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the

devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish to

view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-down menu.


If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system, the current location of the test vehicle will be

displayed on the map as a circle on the route. If there is no GPS connected to the system, you can

define the current location manually. A new GPS event is created in the handler after which all

location-specific data, such as BTS cell names are displayed using the specified location.

You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You

can define which color refers to which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas

on a map.

If you select a BTS file (.nbf) for the measurement file, the base stations will be displayed. A line will

be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station. Also, the distance to the serving base

station is displayed in the status bar of the map window. Note that the BTS file is displayed only if

there is a measurement file loaded on the map as well. The BTS icons display the antennas, the

channel numbers for the antennas, and directions that the antennas point to. The antennas are drawn

in one degree steps. Hover your mouse over the base station icon to see more information about the

BTS.

Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS, the BTS name will be truncated with “…” In

this case, click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells.

You can customize the map view using the MapX properties. The customized settings can be saved in

a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst) and loaded later on. MapInfo Workspaces (*.wor file) cannot be directly

opened with MapX, but can be saved as a .gst file in MapInfo Professional using the MapInfo MapX

Geoset Utility tool (Geoset.mbx) that ships with version 5.x of MapInfo Professional. This file (.gst) can

be directly opened by MapX in Nemo Outdoor.

Note that each MapInfo® map has two files: an image file (.tif. .gif, .jpg) and a .tab file. (Only for raster

images). When MapInfo raster maps are used, the image file is the actual map image file. The .tab file

contains information about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor to

refer to a particular map. When using vector data for MapInfo®, there are three different files that need

to be in the same directory, the .tab, .map, and the .id file. The corresponding image and .tab files for

Raster maps have to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo® map. If you are using a large

map (size over 1 Mb), updating the map window will slow down Nemo Outdoor functions. We

recommend you minimize the map size by reducing the number of colors to 256 or 16, or turning the

color map to black and white.

While viewing notifications on a map, hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip with

information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number.


Map Side Panel


The contents of the map side panel depend on which items have been selected in the map popup

menu. Right-click on a map and select Color Legend, Layers, and Waypoints in the popup menu to

view the three items above. You can drag each view to different places on the map as well, or dock it

to another side of the map window following the arrows that appear when you drag the window. When

you double-click on the displaced view, it will resume its original position in the side panel.

You can view three different kinds of items in the Layers view. The item indicates a device-

specific measurement route on the map, the item indicates a base station file connected to the

measurement route, and the item indicates a route plan. Double-click on an item to access its

Properties dialog (see p.267). You can also access the Properties dialog by right-clicking on the item

and selecting Properties in the popup menu. When you right-click on a layer, the following popup

menu appears:

In the popup menu you can select whether or not you want to show or delete a layer. You can also

clear the option next to the layer item if you do not want to view it, or click on the X button next to the

option to delete the layer.

Through the Properties item you can access the layer’s Properties dialog (see p.267), and you can

also add a new route or a new BTS file from the popup menu or directly from the Layers view. The

Add route functionality is useful, for example, when a multi measurement is loaded, and you want to

view all the routes in the Layers view and all the color legends in the Color legends view.

The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route. If you have loaded a

multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map, the color legends

will be shown next to one another in this view. See page 278 on how to create and edit color sets.

The Waypoints view is meant for controlling route plans. The Show next waypoint field is only

activated when at least one device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in online or

offline mode. This functionality is not active during measurement playback. See the Route Plans

chapter below for more information on waypoints.


Route Plans

Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a measurement. You

can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback mode, or you can manually

create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a measurement and during playback. In

addition, you can alter the route plans at any point through the control buttons in the Waypoints view in

the map side panel. You can save a route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf), and if you have made any

changes to the route plan properties in the map window, you can save them as a custom window for

later use. The custom window will also contain changes made to the color set or Waypoints views.

If you have previously created and saved a route plan (.rpf), you can open it through the Open Route

Plan item in the map toolbar or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Open Route Plan from

the popup menu. The route plan (.rpf) is now viewed on the map and in the map side panel, and is

ready to be used in a measurement. By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from one waypoint to the next.

Creating and Modifying Route Plans with Waypoints

Start Nemo Outdoor with at least one device and a GPS receiver attached to it in online or offline

mode. You can select a ready workspace in the Nemo Outdoor Welcome page (see page 42) as you

start Nemo Outdoor and view a map window, or alternatively you can open a map manually from Data

| Map | New.


You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar,

or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu, and clicking on the map. The Add button at

the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. A new route plan (.rpf) is viewed

in the Layers view, and the Waypoints view is enabled. You can save the route plan for later use by

clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup menu.

You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. The Show next

waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map during a

measurement. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in online or idle

mode, not during playback. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big circle. If you clear the

Show next waypoint option, the Waypoint detection radius and Distance to next waypoint items

will also be disabled.


The Waypoint detection radius slide bar indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint is

selected. As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement, the next waypoint is selected on

the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar. The Distance to

next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next waypoint from the current

position on the route, so the figure decreases as you approach the next waypoint.

You can make changes to the route plan through the four buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints

view. To select a waypoint on the map, click on the Select button in the Waypoints view, then select a

waypoint on the map. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others, and the Distance to

next waypoint field will display the appropriate distance in meters to the next waypoint. In addition,

the delete functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected. If you click on Delete, the

selected waypoint on the route plan will be deleted, and the previous waypoint on the route will

automatically be selected and shown as a bigger circle. If the deleted waypoint was the first waypoint

on the route plan, the next waypoint on the route will be selected. Moreover, the Delete button is only

enabled with the Select button if there is more than one waypoint on the map. Reclick on Select to

clear the functionality.


You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select, then selecting a specific waypoint on

the map. Click on the Move button, and you will be able to move the selected waypoint on the map.

The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the waypoint.

The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side panel is synchronized with the Add waypoint

button in the map toolbar. If you click on either button when they are inactive, they will both be

activated, and conversely if you click on either button when active, they will become inactive. When

you select either, you are able to place new waypoints in the route plan.

Creating and Saving Route Plans from a Measurement

In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints, you can create a route plan from a measurement.

Start Nemo Outdoor, load a measurement file and open a map window. Right-click on the map and

select View Entire Route, or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement contains GPS

coordinates. Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan toolbar icon, or select the

option from the map popup menu. The route plan should now be visible on the map, the layer list

should have a new layer (“Untitled.rpf”), and the control buttons on the Waypoints view should be

enabled. The route plan should closely follow the route from which it was created. Save the route plan

by clicking the Save Route Plan item in the toolbar, or by selecting it in the map popup menu.


You can also modify the route plan with the Select, Move, Add and Delete buttons at the bottom of

the Waypoints view in the side panel. Note that when you click on Select, you may need to zoom in on

the map to view the discrete waypoints. The selected waypoint will show as a bigger circle among all

the circles. See page 254 for more information on how to use the control buttons, and on how to read

the waypoints on the route plan during a measurement.

Saving a Route Plan to a Custom Window

When you create a route plan and save it, the actual route plan will be saved as a Route Plan File

(.rpf). However, if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-specific

properties, and you want to save these changes, you need to save the map window as a custom

window. When you open a measurement the next time, you can open the custom window by right-

clicking on the gray space outside the map window, and select Map | [name of custom window]. You

will also find the custom window in Data | Map | [name of custom window].

First, create or open a route plan, and save it. Next, double-click on the route plan in the map side

panel to access the Route Plan Properties dialog, change the properties and click OK. Change the

settings in the Waypoints view in the side panel, right-click on the map, and select Save As Custom

Window in the map popup menu. Close the map and open the custom window you saved. When you

open the properties dialog, the properties should be what you set them to.


Map Popup Menu

Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map.













Save as Image


Save as MapInfo Tab-file

Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

Save as CSV File

Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format.


Export to Google Earth

By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route, colors

based on selected parameter, notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml file

which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application.

Move View To



Open Map

By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

Save Map

By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the

map with another name.

Find Map at Position

When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item, Nemo Outdoor will view a

list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have specified in the

View | User Interface Properties | Paths dialog. In this way you have the possibility to choose the

most appropriate map for your purposes. You can also browse for a suitable map manually by clicking

on the Browse button and browsing your local folders.

Create Route Plan

The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map window.

Open Route Plan

Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map.

Save Route Plan

The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

Add Waypoints

Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.


Find Cell

With Find cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter. Below a

cell is searched based on its Cell ID number.

Tool

Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup.

Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow.

Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map.

Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point.

Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and

out using the mouse wheel and the + and - keyboard buttons.

Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is activated

only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.

Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Note that this

command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot be used

during playback.


Auto Center

The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible

area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command

is selected.

Auto Clear Route

The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement is

stopped. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement, unselect the

tool.

Previous View and View Entire Map

With the Previous View command, you can return to the previous map view, and the View Entire

Map command displays the whole map.

View Entire Route

By selecting the View Entire Route item you will be able to view the whole route on the map.

Scale

The Scale appears in the window when the respective selection is activated.

Modify Route

With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback. This is

especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route, for example, because GPS fix was lost in

a tunnel.

Right-click on a map and select Modify Route from the popup menu.


The route will be displayed as dots.

Drag and drop the dots into their new positions. Please note that you should maintain the correct order

of the dots. Otherwise the route will appear jagged.


When you have finished modifying the route, right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route tool.

The modified route is now displayed in normal mode.

Textual Comments

With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual

Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be

repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the text

box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select Textual

Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

Color Legend

Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.

Layers

By selecting the Layers item you will be able to view all the layers of the map in the map side panel.

Waypoints

The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. You can create and

save a route plan for later use.


Measure Distance

Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map. Click the

Measure Distance button to activate the tool and click the Add point button. Select the points on

the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map. The Total distance is

displayed in the left-hand panel.

With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last two

points is used as the radius.


To remove points from the map, click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons. To hide

the Measure Distance panel, click the Measure Distance button.

Side Panel

When Side Panel is selected, you will be able to view the side panel in the map window. The Color

Legend, Layers and Waypoints items can only be viewed in the side panel, and if you activate any of

these items, also the side panel will be shown along with the specific item. However, if you start by

activating the side panel, all the three items will be shown in the side panel.

Full Screen

Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode.

Layer Properties

The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer selected in

the map side panel. It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side panel: the device-

specific measurement route layer, the base station layer, and the route plan layer.

Route Properties

When a measurement route is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select

Layer Properties, the Route Properties dialog appears. You can also access this dialog by double-

clicking on the device-specific route layer in the side-panel.

In the case of multi measurements, you need to select a device in the drop-down menu on the Device page.

Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting point of the measurement route.

By clicking on the MapX Properties button you will enter the MapX Properties dialog (see p.276).


In the Route page you can define route line specific settings.

The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels. The X offset and Y

offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions.

With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in

numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors.

Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction.

The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the

Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in

pixels.

If you select the Draw thicker line when using high band option, the route will be drawn thicker

when the device is using the 1800/1900 band.

When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn during when measurement

is in pause.


On the Color page you can define route-specific line coloring.

Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with the

same color.

If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select the Use color set option.

First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. If you are measuring with a

scanner, also select the channels/pilots displayed by clicking the Select Channels/Select Pilots

button. Then select a matching color set in the Color set field. Click the Edit Color Set button to

access the Color Set Editor dialog. See page 278 for more information on defining color sets.

Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the route

will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values.

Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.

If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select from

the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value.

When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For example, if

the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the system route is not drawn

while in GSM.


On the Notifications page select the Show notifications option to view notification icons on the map.

You can also define the notification icon size in pixels.


By selecting the Show Textual notes option on the Textual notes page, you will be able to view

textual notes on a measurement route in the map window. You can select a text and background color

for the note in the Text color and Background color fields.

The Base stations page displays information on the open BTS files on the map.

Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Select a BTS file

by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side panel. See page 252 for more information.

Select the Show Active Cell Information option to display active base stations along with channel

numbers and cell IDs.

Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the test

vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.

Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to the test

vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.

Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option, if you only want to draw a line from active

system cell(s) to the test vehicle.

Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing

neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that lines

to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a scanner. If missing

neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only, this information is not shown on the map.

Instead, the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid.

Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the test

vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Please note that a BTS file must be used with this

feature. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the terminal output file and

due to this reason, the interfering cells can be seen on a map only when a BTS file is used with the

terminal.

Click OK to exit the Route Properties dialog.


BTS Properties

When a base station file is selected in the map side panel, the BTS Properties dialog appears when

Layer Properties is selected in the map popup menu. You can also view the dialog by double-clicking

on the BTS file in the map side panel.

BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. The BTS file is selected in the

Measurement Properties - General dialog. See page Error! Bookmark not defined. for more

information. You can also select the BTS file through this dialog.

If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e.g., UMTS and GSM), select

the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations from the active

system, in other words, the system in which the test device is currently. The other base stations are

hidden.


Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. Note that you define a different color for active system

base stations and for other base stations. The Selected BTS cell color refers to neighbor cells that

can be highlighted on the map if neighbor information is defined in a BTS file. Neighboring cells are

highlighted with the selected color and the selected cell is shown with the same color but also with a

bolded outline. The tooltip shows neighbor cell names for the selected cell.

Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different base

stations through the use of existing and user-defined color sets.

Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color base

stations, and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu.


Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can edit

existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs.

See page 278 for more information on how to edit and create color sets.

On the Cell info page you can choose what information is displayed from each base station.

Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell information

and define the Text color and Background color.


In the example below, all cell information and the Show labels option are selected.

The Connected Devices page displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station sites.

Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected.


The Cell Range page enables you to view cell range on the map. Define the degree of cell range

transparency in the Cell Range transparency slide bar.

Route Plan Properties

When a route plan is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer

Properties, the Route Plan Properties dialog appears. You can also view the dialog by double-

clicking on the route plan in the map side panel.

Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side panel.

The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line attaching the icons together. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels.

The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y directions.

MapX Properties

Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings

differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking

the Save Map button in the Map window. To later open the .gst file, click the Open Map button, select

MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox, and select a file from the list.


If you are using MapInfo® maps, you can define the appearance of the map even further by clicking

the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. In the Layers tab the table shows a list of

the current layers. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are displayed on a map;

for example, in this case the Route layer is on the top, Current Position layer is under that, and World

map is at the bottom. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map on the bottom (e.g., a map

of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e.g., of Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers

on the map click Add. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose the map you want to add as a

layer. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you can change the map’s position on

the list. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer

on the map. To remove layers from the map, select the layer from the list and click the Remove

button.


Color Set Editor

You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route Properties |

Color dialog. You can also access the Color Set Editor by selecting View | Color Set Editor.., or by

double-clicking Color sets in the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+ M). With the Color Set Editor you can

define and name color sets to be used in maps and grids. In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a

list of all existing color sets. You can sort the color sets by selecting the Type. You can also search for

a color set by its name. To edit an existing color set, double-click on the color set.

In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set.


Name and Short name identify the color set.

You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field.

Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with, numerical, gradient, or string. The Groups

and Type settings can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog.

Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them.

Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. In the Range Properties dialog, select the color

and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. You can also write a description for the value

range. Finally click OK.

Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. In the Add Range dialog,

define the top and bottom values and the step, i.e., how many values are represented by the same

color. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the parameter values.


Map Example 1

In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the Active set size color set.

In the Route Properties | Route dialog, Color page, select Number of TBF-s Uplink in the Parameter

field, and Active set size in the Color Set field, and click OK. The Color Legend in the map side panel

displays the color codes for the Active set size values.


Map Example 2

In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the TX Power color set. In the

Measurement's Route Properties dialog, Color page, select TX Power in the Parameter and Color

Set fields and click OK. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for the TX

Power values. In this color set, green means a low TX Power level and red a high level.


Map Example 3

In the map below, the measurement route is colored using the EcN0 color set. Base station icons are

displayed and a red line is drawn to the serving base station and a blue line to the neighbor stations.

In the Layer view in the map side panel, click on Add BTS File, or right-click on the measurement

layer and select Add BTS File. Right-click on the measurement layer in the map side panel again, and

select Properties | Base stations. Select the Draw line to active base station, and Draw line(s) to

neighbor cell(s) options. On the Color page, select the Use color set option, select Ec/N0 (Active) in

the Parameter field, and EcN0 in the Color set field. Click OK. The Color Legend in the side panel

displays the color codes for the EcNo values.


Map Example 4

In the map below, the same measurement route is drawn twice on the map. The route with the blue

current location symbol is colored using the Ec/N0 color set, and the route with the black current

location symbol is colored using the MS Power Level color set.

In the Layers view click the Add Route button, or right-click on the existing measurement layer and

select Add Route. Select a device from the Route Properties | Device page, and now there should

be two measurements in the Layers view in the side panel. Right-click on the first measurement route

and select Properties. On the Route Properties | Color page, select the Use color set option, and

Ec/N0(active) in the Parameter field, and Ec/N0 in the Color set field. Click OK.

Next, right-click on the second measurement in the Layers view, and select Properties. In the Route

Properties | Color page, select the Use color set option, and MS Power Level in the Parameter field,

and MS Power Level in the Color set field. Click OK.

You will see the two adjacent routes colored with the above-mentioned color sets on the map. In

addition, you will see the measurements in the Layers view, and their color sets in the Color legends

view in the map side panel.


Map Example 5

It is possible to export a map with measurement route, colors based on selected parameter,

notifications, and base station information to Google Earth .kml file. The Google Earth application

needs to be installed for viewing the file.

Click on the Export to Google Earth toolbar button in the map window.


A Save As dialog appears. Select a destination for the saved .kml file in the Save in field, and type a

name for the map to be exported in the File name field. Click Save.

Go to the file destination and double-click on the saved file to open it. Note that you must have Google

Earth installed on your laptop to view the file.

The route and cell information are visible on the Google Earth map.


VIEWING FLOORPLANS

Open an indoor map by selecting Data | Indoor | New and click the Open Map button.

It is possible to view selected parameters in indoor map by drag and dropping them in it. Click on a

parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. Parameters can also be opened

for all devices at once and seen on different views. First, press down the Ctrl button and select the

devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. After this, right-click on the parameter you wish to

view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor from the drop-down menu.

To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (.mrk) attached to the measurement file

(.nmf). To move the markers on the map, select a marker in the Markers | Index field, click on Move

and select a new destination for the marker.


On the map you can view, for example, a floorplan of the test site. While you are performing the

measurement and walking around in the building, use the markers to draw the measurement route on

the floor plan. If you are running Nemo Outdoor on the Microsoft XP Tablet PC Edition, click with the

Tablet PC pen on the screen and the marker will be placed there. You can observe the values of

certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. You can define which color refers to

which parameter value. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map. Map layers can be

saved to .gst file and also as a custom window.

You can make changes to a route by selecting a layer in the Layers view and double-clicking on it to

view the layer properties dialog. Alternatively, you can right-click on the map and select Properties

which views the properties dialog for the active layer, or click on the Properties button in the

Indoor map toolbar.

In the Route Properties dialog that appears select a route in the Device drop-down menu. The Route

page enables you to define route line thickness in the Thickness field. It is also possible to select a

default color or parameter color set for the route in the Color page. In the Notifications page you can

choose whether to view notifications on the map. Click OK to exit the dialog.

Multiple Routes and Floorplans

You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. Click on Add Route in the Layers view in the

side panel to add a route, and go through the steps mentioned above.

The floorplan below has three routes, two with parameter-based coloring and one with a default color.

When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists, you can switch between the color

legends in the Color legends side panel.


You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in the

Layers view. This makes it possible for you to have, for example, indoor maps of different floors on

the same building at once. You can switch between the different floorplans through the Go

Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons.

Indoor Route Planning

Prior to conducting indoor measurements, you can plan the route in the indoor map window. You can

create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar, and

clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also

activated. A new route plan (.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. You can save the route plan for later

use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup

menu.


The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with outdoor

maps. See page 254 for more information.


Indoor Map Popup Menu

Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the

map.













Save as Image


Save as MapInfo Tab-File

Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

Save as CSV File

Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format.


Move View To



Open Map

By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

Save Map

By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the

map with another name.

Import Map

You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as maps. Click the Import Map

button in the map toolbar or select Import Map from the popup menu. The Map Import Parameters

dialog is opened.

In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly, you must define some map settings.

Either define the dimensions in meters of the area visible on the map or define the GPS coordinates of

the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the map area.

Create Route Plan

The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map

window.


Open Route Plan

Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor map.

Save Route Plan

The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

Add Waypoints


Tool

The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. With the Add

Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Arrow selection changes the

cursor back to an arrow. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map.

The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. The Zoom In and

Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and out using

the mouse wheel. The Clear Route command removes the measurement route from the map. Note

that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.

Auto Center

The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible

area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command

is selected.

View Entire Map

The View Entire Map command displays the whole map.

View Entire Route

The View Entire Route command displays the whole route.

Textual Comments

With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual

Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be

repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the text

box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select Textual

Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

Show Minimap

With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window. Minimap

displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a red square.


Show Marker Info

Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file.

Color Legend

Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.

Show Markers

Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map.

Show Layers

Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side panel.

Full Screen

Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen. Close the full screen view by clicking on

Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.

Route Properties – Indoor Map

In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings.

Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map.

Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings

differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking

the Save Map button in the Map window.


In the Route page you can define route line specific settings.

The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels. The X offset and Y

offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions.

With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in

numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors.

Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction.

The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the

Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in

pixels.

When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn when measurement is

paused.


Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with the

same color.

If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select the Use color set button.

First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a matching color set

in the Color set field. Click the Edit Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog. See page

267 for more information on defining color sets.

If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select from

the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value.

When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For example, if

the route is colored based Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the route is not drawn while in GSM.

Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the route

will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values.

Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.


Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map. You can define the

size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field.


ENDING MEASUREMENTS

The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the main

window. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement.

To end the measurements:

1. If you are using a script to perform the measurement, you can either wait until the script file has

been executed or interrupt the script either by selecting Measurement | Stop Script or by clicking

the Stop button on the toolbar.

2. If you are performing measurements manually, the measurement process is terminated either by

selecting Measurement | Stop or by clicking the Stop button on the toolbar. All the ongoing

calls will be stopped and scanning will be terminated. Data transfers will be stopped, PDP context

will be deactivated, and GPRS detach will be performed.

3. Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. At this point, you can choose if

you would like to save this file or delete it. You can also start a playback of this file.

10. If you wish to exit Nemo Outdoor, select File | Exit or click the cross in the upper right corner of

the Nemo Outdoor main window.

When carrying out measurements using a script, stopping the measurement is not

recommended while a test call is on. Always wait until the end of the call, then select

Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. If the measurement

is stopped while the test call is on, it may affect the Quality Survey Report values. The Call

Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report might indicate calls to be shorter

than they actually were.

ENDI NG MEASUREMENTS 299

MEASUREMENT REPORT

The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped. The dialog displays some

statistics from the measurement.

Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel .csv file. The

filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results folder.

If you do not want this dialog to appear, select the Do not show this dialog again option.

To save the measurement file under another name, click the Rename button and type a new file name

in the field that appears. To delete the file without saving, click the Delete button.

Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately. To save the file with the

default name, click Save.

Note that if you press Esc on your computer’s keyboard, or click on the button on the

dialog, you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save button.


Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze.

Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze 5.X installed on the same computer where

Nemo Outdoor is installed.

In the Analyze Measurement dialog, select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a report

template that is used for creating a report from the data. If you do not select a workbook or a report,

the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting Nemo Analyze. Finally

click Upload.

MEASUREMENT RESULTS 301

MEASUREMENT RESULTS

This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo

Outdoor, and explains how measurement files are uploaded to an FTP server.

The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time, depending on whether you

have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time. The file name

can be user defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part. If you change the file name

manually, the file name format should be xxxx.1.nmf where the number refers to the device number.

ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed, for example, with:

Nemo Outdoor Playback functions

Nemo tool Nemo Analyze

Text editor

Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft® Excel

Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Anite Finland Ltd.

PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES

Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements. You can playback files

anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on.

Selecting Playback Files

When you open a file for playback, Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices. Nemo

Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. If you answer Yes, Nemo Outdoor will

save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before the playback

when you close the playback file(s).


To open files for playback, select File Open Measurement. This will open up the following dialog.

See also p. 42 for more information on how to open measurement files for playback.

In the dialog, you can look for a file by clicking the … button. The File Header box displays the

measurement file header. If you have selected a multi measurement, you can still clear some of the

files from playback.

During Playback

The Playback commands can be executed with a set of toolbar buttons. The same commands can be

found in the Playback menu.

The Play button starts the playback.

The Pause button pauses the playback.

The Stop button stops the playback.

With the Add Textual Note button you can add written

remarks in the measurement file.

The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback; that is, the

starting, ending, and current time. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain

points in the measurement.


Viewing and Moving Markers

You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file during

measurements. After a file has been loaded, select the Play command from the Playback menu or

click the Play button on the tool bar.

Open a marker grid from Data | Events Grid | User Markers.

The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during measurements.

Click on any of the markers in the grid window, and all the other open windows will display the same

point of time.


Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. You can move the

markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move button.

Place the red pin to the new location on the map. The new longitude and latitude information is saved

in the marker file.

Closing Playback Files

After playback, you need to close the playback file. Select File | Close Measurement. If you saved

the current device configuration when you started the playback, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would

like to load the same device(s).

UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO AN FTP SERVER

You can upload measurement files from Nemo Outdoor to an FTP server when a measurement is

stopped, or at any later point via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Note that Nemo Outdoor must be

in offline mode during the transfer, as otherwise the modem ports required for the FTP transfer will be

in use.


Select File | Send Measurement to FTP Server. Select one or more measurements in the Send

Measurement to FTP Server dialog.

Click on the FTP Options button.

In the FTP Options dialog you can define the FTP Server and Proxy server settings.


Under FTP Server you can define the FTP server address in the Server address field, and the name

of the folder to which the measurement files are sent on the FTP server in the Remote folder field.

The Username and Password fields will grant you permission to access the server. You can also

select the Use passive mode option for the transfer, and when the Move local files to “Sent” folder

after upload option is selected, the measurement files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo

Tools directory on your computer after the transfer. You can also change this default destination folder

to another one in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements.

The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection or via a user-selected dial-up

connection.

When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password

fields will become active. After configuring the FTP settings, click OK. The Measurement file(s) are

sent to the FTP server.

USER INT ERF ACE 307

USER INTERFACE

This section presents the Nemo Outdoor user interface. You will find general descriptions on all the

commands and windows. The functions and dialogs related to the commands are described in detail in

the following sections.

The Nemo Outdoor user interface is compatible with common Windows® standards. If you are not

familiar with these standards, refer to your Microsoft® Windows® Documentation.

VIEW GROUPS

View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different tabs for

easier viewing. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at the same time

and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window. Now you can create

view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups. Each view group appears at

the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by clicking the tab.

When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time, you will have one default view group. To rename the

default view group, right-click on the tab and select Rename.

Enter a name for the view group and click OK.

To create a new view group, right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups, and select

Create New. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. The new view group appears as another

tab.

To organize measurement windows into the view groups, open a view group, for example, Maps, and

open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. Then go to another view

group by clicking on the respective tab, for example, Graphs and open measurement windows there.

The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will be opened the next time you start

Nemo Outdoor.


MENU BAR

The menu bar contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in menus. Some

commands execute their respective operations immediately, while others will first display a dialog with

options for you to select from. A command ending in three dots (…) will open a dialog. Note that you

can use shortcut keys to carry out some of the commands. The shortcut keys are presented on the

menus next to the menu commands.

TOOLBAR

You can use the toolbar with the mouse for quick access to frequently used commands. In the View

menu, you can choose to hide the toolbar; this will bring more space to the other objects in the main

window.

The Nemo Outdoor toolbar comprises of a set of buttons that allow you to perform common tasks

quickly. For example, to start the measurement, just click the Start Recording button on the toolbar.

See page 333 for more information on the Nemo Outdoor toolbar buttons.

STATUS BAR

The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information depending

on the operations you are performing. For example, when you are pointing to a toolbar button with the

mouse (without clicking), the status bar will show a description of the corresponding function. You can

also see a brief description of the same function in a help box that appears next to the button when

you hold the mouse over the button long enough. There is also a time slider which you can use to

jump into certain points in the measurement.

In the View menu, you can select to hide the status bar; this will bring more space to the other objects

in the main window.


NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS

The menus in the Nemo Outdoor software are introduced next.

File Menu

The File menu allows you to open and save Workspace files and Device Configurations.

Measurement files for playback are also opened through the File menu.

By selecting the Save Workspace on Exit option, the current configuration is saved in a file and

opened automatically the next time the program is started. The Work Offline item activates and

deactivates the offline mode. The Send Measurement to FTP Server enables you to send

measurement files to an FTP server (see p.304). With the Export and Import Settings items you can

export and import settings into an .aex file. The following items are stored in the .aex file:

Scripts

Color sets

Custom views

Device configurations

Notification settings

Route plans

Workspaces

You can also export measurements. Note that measurement needs to be closed before export.


The Recent Workspaces, Recent Device Configurations, and Recent Measurements items

display the recently used workspaces and device configurations and recently viewed playback files,

respectively. With the Exit command you can close the program.

Edit Menu

In the Edit menu, you can copy and save as images selected items from the Nemo Outdoor program.

The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid (see page

243).

View Menu

In the View menu, you can select, hide and display items of the main window, such as the standard

toolbar, custom window toolbar, status indicator, output, and device info, those you wish to see on the

screen. Through quick windows you have easy access to custom windows defined by the user. You

can also access the Configuration Manager, Color Set Editor, Notification Manager, User

Parameters and the User Interface Properties dialogs. Through the View Groups item you can

create new view groups or switch between existing view groups. See page 307 for more information

on the view groups. The Active View Properties will open a properties dialog for the currently active

window.


Measurement Menu

Through the Measurement menu, you can control the measurement process and add, autodetect and

remove devices.

The Start Scripts command starts and stops a user-defined script file. These same commands can be

executed by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button in the toolbar. In the Script Editor you can edit

script files. You can also add markers and textual notes in the measurement file. The Clear Buffers

command will empty the event history buffer. This does not affect the measurement file.

Through the All Devices item you can control several devices at once. For example, you can make a

voice call or send an SMS with all test mobiles connected to Nemo Outdoor.


Below All Devices are listed individually all measurement devices connected to the system. Through

these items you can control and configure the individual test terminals.

Device Properties (p.67), General Properties (p.Error! Bookmark not defined.), Measurement

Properties (p. 72), Notification Properties (p.60), and Script Properties (p.157) dialogs can be

accessed through this menu. By selecting the Reset command, you can reset the Devices window, for

example, if you want to reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it.

The menu also offers access to various actions that can be performed during manual measurements.

If you are using scripts to run measurements, you will not need these commands.

The following functions can be found in this menu.

Please note that the menu displays only those functions that are supported by the device.

Band Lock (page 180)

Cell Barring (page 186)

Channel Locking (page 176)

Handover/Handoff Control (page 181)

Missing Neighbor Detection (page 188)

Cell Testing (page 186)

Timeslot Testing (page 191)


Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners.

Playback Menu

The Playback menu offers you commands for the playback of measurement data. The same

commands can also be executed by means of toolbar buttons. With the Play, Pause, and Stop

commands you can control the playback. You can also add markers and textual notes in the playback

file.

Data Menu

Through the Data menu you can open different views for observing a measurement. You can also

access the Open Custom Window dialog (see p.321).

Under each type you will find a selection of premade custom windows of the selected type. If you

select New, Nemo Outdoor will open an empty graph of the selected type.

By right-clicking the Spectrum Graph item you are able to see the static line graph displaying

spectrum scanning results. By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window, it is possible to

see the RX level for certain frequencies shown on the side panel. Markers can be also edited, added

or removed via edit marker window.


The Grid items offer a selection of grid types. Events grids list, by default, all measurement events but

the user can configure the view so that only events that are of special interest are displayed.

Parameters grids display selected network parameters. Statistics grids list various statistics, such as,

the number of PDP context activation attempts, successes, and failures from the measurement.

Messages grids are used for observing layer 2 and 3, RLC/MAC, and LLC messages. Table grids

provide an easy way of simultaneously displaying the same parameter values for multiple instances.

For example, the neighbor list of a serving cell can be displayed in a table grid so that each row

represents one neighbor and each column represents a parameter value (e.g., system, carrier,

scrambling code, etc.). The Packet Decoder Grid offers a chance to display and decode packet

capture files in playback mode.

The Indoor item opens a floorplan (see page 286). The Map item opens a map window (see page

250).


The Save as Custom Window… item offers a quick way to save your own custom windows. The

custom windows are presented on page 321.

The Save Changes option saves changes to measurement windows. For example, if you resize the

windows, Nemo Outdoor will open the window in the same size the next time you start the program.

Window Menu

The Window menu provides you with a list of all open windows on the main window. You can switch

the focus between these windows and arrange them with the Cascade, Tile Horizontally, Tile

Vertically, and Arrange Icons commands. With the Close All command you can close all windows at

once. The active window is marked with a check mark .

Help Menu

The Help menu offers you quick access to all the most important help topics. By selecting the License

Information item, you can check the current license status for your Nemo Outdoor version. From the

About dialog you can also receive further information on the Nemo Outdoor application, including the

contact information and the application version number.


CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS

Nemo Outdoor menus and toolbars are fully customizable. To edit the contents of menus, to add new

menus, or edit the toolbars, right-click on the menu bar or toolbar at the top of the main window and

select Customize.

In the Toolbars page hide and display the default toolbars by clearing and selecting the

corresponding options. Click the New button to create a new toolbar. In the New Toolbar dialog, type

a name for the new toolbar and click OK.


The new toolbar is added to the Customize dialog. Delete the toolbar by selecting it and clicking the

Delete button.

In the Commands page you will find all available commands sorted under categories. Drag

commands from the list to a toolbar or menu.


To remove commands from a toolbar or menu, drag and drop the command outside the toolbar or

menu. If you want to restore the original toolbar and menu content, open the Customize dialog (right-

click on main toolbar and select Customize) and in the Toolbars page, select the toolbar or menu bar

you want to restore and click the Reset button.


In the Options page you can further personalize the appearance of toolbars and menus. For example,

you can activate large icons for toolbars for easier viewing or change the menu animations.

You can also change the icon for each toolbar button. Open the Customize dialog, right-click on a

button, and select Change Button Image.


NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS

The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly user configurable. Different network parameters and events

can be viewed as line graphs, bars, and dots. To make the measuring process easier for first-time

users, Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include some essential windows

for specific types of measuring. The users are also able to make their own custom windows and save

them for later use.

The Output, Device Info, and Script Status windows can be hidden automatically so that they only

slide out in view when you move the mouse cursor on top of the tab labeling the hidden window.

To activate the auto-hide feature for a window, click the pin symbol at the upper right corner of the

window. To deactivate the auto-hide setting from a window, click the pin symbol again.


Custom Windows

Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed through

the Data menu or the Custom window tool bar if selected in the View menu. They are also accessible

through the parameter tree. The custom windows are grouped under the corresponding graph and grid

types. You can also browse for the existing custom windows through the Open Custom Window

dialog (Data | Open Custom Window).

You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph, grid, map, indoor view) or by

technology (AMPS, CDMA, GSM, UMTS, etc.). Select the custom window you would like to open from

the table on the right and click Open.

You can also save your own custom windows. When you have set up a graph view that you would like

to use later on, activate the window that you would like to save and select Data | Save as Custom

Window. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new custom window. After clicking OK,

the window is added to the custom windows list. If you want to remove some custom windows, select

the custom window that you want to remove and click the Delete button.

The Quick Windows bar (go to View, and select Quick Windows) in

Nemo Outdoor main window offers quick access to custom windows. Click on one of the quick

windows, and select a custom window from the list. Click OK. The next time you click on the same

quick window button, that selected custom window will appear.


Parameter Tree Search Functionality

A user-specified search string can be used to search parameters, parameter short names and

possible alias names.

In addition, the string matching supports multiple search substrings separated by spaces i.e. HSDPA

BLER search string matches, for example, HSDPA MAC-hs BLER and HSDPA HARQ process BLER.

Device Info Window for Mobiles

The Device Info window displays some device-specific information. The field at the top of the window

displays the device status. The green light at the upper right corner is blinking whenever the device is

active and connected. You can also see the transfer protocol and progress in the Device Info window.

The Expand Device Info Window button displays/hides the

window.

The Configure Notifications button opens a dialog where you

can select events of which Nemo Outdoor will display a

message in the Output window.


Under the Device Commands button, you will find the menu below:

The commands will be activated depending on the type of test mobile you are using. If your test

mobile supports only voice calls, then only the first item is activated.

Under the Device Settings button, you will find the menu below.

Device Properties (p.67), General Properties (p.72), Measurement Properties (p. 72), Notification

Properties (p.60), and Script Properties (p.82) dialogs can be accessed through the Device Settings

menu. By selecting Reset command, you can reset the Device Info window, for example, if you want

to reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it. The other items open dialogs related to the

specific functions.


Device Info Window for Scanners

The Device Info window displays some device-specific information. The field at the top of the window

displays the device status. The green light at the upper right corner is blinking whenever the device is

active and connected.

The Expand Device Info Window button displays/hides the

window.

The Configure Notifications button opens a dialog where you

can select events of which Nemo Outdoor will display a

message in the Output window.

Under the Device Settings button, you will find the menu below.

The Device Properties and Measurement Properties dialogs are explained in more detail on pages

Error! Bookmark not defined. and Error! Bookmark not defined., respectively. By selecting Reset

command, you can reset the Device Info window, for example, if you want to reconnect and activate a

device after disconnecting it.

Output Window

The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. Icons ( ) next

to the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. For example, the speech

bubble indicates a normal message, the orange flag a warning, the red flag an error message, and the

exclamation mark a notification. The window can be opened by choosing View | Output. You can

clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting Clear Window from the popup

menu.


Script Status Window

Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners, this window is also not available when

making scanner measurements.

From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current

measurement.

Controlling Windows

You can have several windows open at the same time. The minimizing, maximizing, and closing

functions for individual windows operate in the same way as in all Windows applications. The active

window is indicated through a color specified in the Windows® Control Panel to indicate an active

window (see your Microsoft® Windows® Documentation).

You can drag windows outside the Nemo Outdoor desktop area to make more space on the main

window.

Cascade Windows

The Cascade command in the Window menu organizes the windows in an overlapping array. You can

bring any window to the top by selecting it from the Window menu or by clicking any visible part of that

window (except for the Minimize, Maximize, and Close buttons in the top right corner). You can also

bring the next window to the top by selecting the Next command from the window-specific menu (top

left corner of the window).

Tile Windows

The Tile command in the Window menu organizes the windows side by side, filling the whole space

so that all windows are visible at the same time. The windows can be tiled horizontally or vertically.

Arrange Icons

The windows that have been minimized to icons can be arranged evenly in a row at the bottom of the

main window, starting from the left side. To do this, select the Arrange Icons command in the Window

menu.

Close All

The Close All command in the Window menu can be used to close all measurement windows in the

Nemo Outdoor main window.


Saving Window Settings

If you wish to retain the same settings on your main window the next time you use Nemo Outdoor,

activate the Save Workspace on Exit command in the File menu. Clicking the command will result on

a check mark ; the second click will remove the mark.

HOW TO READ MIMO PARAMETERS IN BAR GRAPH DATA VIEW

In the bar below, graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports. CQI for antenna port 0 is on the top

and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port. E.g. in the example below three

percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna port 0 and CQI value 3 has been

used for antenna port 1. Bars are colored based on CQI type to indentify used CQI type. CQI type A is

shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red.

If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed, it can be seen from the HSDPA link

adaptation information table grid. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from the last sample

duration which is set to 200ms. E.g., four percentage of the time during the sample duration

modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size 14411 bits and for the

second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size 12266 bits.

TRO UBLESHOOTI NG 327

TROUBLESHOOTING

This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo Outdoor.

LOW THROUGHPUT

In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications,

read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols.

In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications,

the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters.

For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad

coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio)

points to capacity, server or transmission problems.

In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR).

PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell, a

bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the

available bandwidth).

Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are

other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that

prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput.

High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage.

When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be

higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme

Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the radio

link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values.

Other things that could help troubleshooting:

Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some HSPA USB

interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry.

Try another FTP server for comparison.

Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because command prompt

FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. For better results, keep

Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. Also

try different servers.

For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if

the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always needed.

For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test

simultaneous transfers. Works also manually.


All Windows Versions

How to check the TCP window size from packet logs:

Using Wireshark:

1. Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer.

Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.

Using Nemo Outdoor:

1. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.

2. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:

11. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the Tcp tree. Window shows the current

value.

Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.):

1. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.

TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry.

TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default.

TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP

window.

12. A measurement file (.nmf) does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is always

needed.


Windows XP

Check registry value of

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\TcpipParameters\TcpWindowSize.

Windows and Nemo Outdoor both use it if it exists. The value can be changed manually or by using

TcpOptimizer software. If the registry value is missing, Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size

which is 256 KB.

Windows Vista/Windows7

Windows Vista/7 does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window

size which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP uses is

set, Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases, the

registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. This

registry entry can be removed.

If TCP auto-tuning is disabled, Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size 256 KB. Outdoor 5.40

and later checks the auto-tuning state and does not change any window sizes if auto-tuning is

enabled.

How to check TCP auto-tuning state:

1. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field.

2. Type ”netsh interface tcp show global”

3. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.

Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.

4. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Right-click and

select Run as administrator.


5. To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled”. This limits the

TCP window size to 64KB. However, Outdoor sets its own default 256KB when auto-tuning is

disabled.

6. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses, type “netsh interface tcp set

global autotuning=highlyrestricted”.

7. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:

disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535).

highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value,

very conservatively.

restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its

default value.

normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions.

experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not

recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended for research

purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.


DEVICE INFO WINDOW

The Device info window displays the device status.

If a green light is blinking, it means that the device is properly connected to Nemo Outdoor and is

functioning normally.

If a red light is blinking, it means that the device has been disconnected. Connect the device and

select Reset from the Device Settings menu.

CANNOT ADD DEVICES

If the Add button is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo

Outdoor, your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. Please, see page 23 for

more information on copy protection.

If the copy protection dongle is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated, check that recording is

not on. Also, playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close Measurement).

CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS

If the commands are inactive in the Device Commands menu , check that you have devices online.

The Work offline or online button should be unselected.


PROBLEMS WITH GPS RECEIVERS

The Windows® XP and Vista operating systems sometimes confuse a GPS receiver with the

computer’s mouse. When this occurs, the mouse stops working correctly. In this case, follow the steps

below.

1. Select Start | Settings | Control Panel. Double-click on System.

2. Go to the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button.

3. Double-click on Mice and other pointing devices. A Microsoft Serial BallPoint device should appear.

4. Right click on the Microsoft Serial BallPoint device and select Disable from the popup menu.

5. Confirm the disabling by clicking Yes in the message box.

6. The mouse device is now disabled and the GPS device can be reconnected.

MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION

Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the

measurement is stopped. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for playback.

The user is notified by the Nemo Outdoor user interface when opening a measurement file where

modification is detected. However, measurement files are still opened normally. The last line in the

measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and checksum information.

#HASH,14:46:49.262,1,"0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0"

Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5.4 or earlier do not include checksum information and

the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo Outdoor version 5.50 or

later.

NEMO OUTDOOR BUT TO NS 333

NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS

TOOLBAR BUTTONS These are the buttons available in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

Title Button Description

Open Playback File(s) Opens an existing measurement for playback

Open Workspace Opens an existing workspace file.

Save Workspace Saves the current workspace configuration.

Configuration Manager

Opens the Configuration Manager dialog.

Work Offline Switches the offline mode on and off.

Start Recording Nemo Outdoor starts writing a file of the current measurement.

Start Playback Starts the playback with the selected files.

Pause Pauses the playback/recording.

Stop Stops the playback/recording.

Start/Stop Scripts Switches a script on/off.

Add Marker Adds a marker in the measurement file or on the Indoor map.

Add Textual Note Adds a textual note in the measurement file.

Open Custom Window Opens the Open Custom Window dialog.

Save As New Custom Window

Saves the active window as a new custom window.

Save Changes to Custom Window

Saves changes to the active custom window.

Save As Image Saves the active window as an image file (.jpg).


DIALOG BUTTONS

These are the dialog buttons used in Nemo Outdoor.


Expand Device Info Window

Displays the selected device info parameters in the Device Info window.

Configure Notifications

Opens the Notifications dialog where you can select the events of which Nemo Outdoor will display or play a notification.

Device Commands Through the Device Commands

button you have access to various mobile specific functions.

Device Settings

Offers access to several dialogs.

Autodetect Devices

Automatically detects devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.

Refresh Updates information in the

Configuration Manager.

Properties

Opens a Properties dialog for the selected item in the Configuration Manager.

Add

Adds a new device, event trigger, or script depending on the item selected in the Configuration Manager.

Remove Removes the selected device,

event trigger, or script from the Configuration Manager.


GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS

These are the toolbar buttons available when using graphs.


Hide Layer

Hides the selected layer in the graph

Remove Layer

Removes the selected layer

New Layer Opens the New Layer dialog

where you can configure a new layer to be added in the active graph.

Layer Properties

Opens the Layer Properties dialog where you can edit an existing layer.

Move Layer Down Moves the selected layer down in

the layer view

Move Layer Up Moves the selected layer up in the

layer view

Set Stacked Mode If there are two or more layers in

a graph, you can view them in stacked mode; that is, in separate graphs.

Autoscroll

When the button is pressed down, the graph is scrolling automatically as the measurement proceeds.

Show Panels

Displays the info panel with numerical values on the right side of the graph.


MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS

These are the toolbar buttons available when using maps.


Open Map

Opens the Open dialog for selecting a map file.

Save Map

Saves the current map layers and settings into a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst).

Import Map

Opens the Map Import Parameters dialog for importing bitmap images as floorplans. Available only in the Indoor map.

Layer Properties

Opens the selected layer's Properties dialog where you can configure the layer properties.

Find Map at Position

With the automatic map find feature the user can easily locate all maps from same location.

Create Route Plan

Creates a route plan from an open measurement.

Open Route Plan

Through this item you can open saved route plans.

Save Route Plan

Allows you to save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf).

Add Waypoint


Arrow

Changes the cursor into an arrow, which you can use for selecting items.

Pan

Changes the cursor into a hand, which you can use for dragging the map to a different position. Place the hand on the map. Keep the left mouse button pressed down and move the map.

Center

Changes the cursor into the center tool, which you can use for selecting a point on the map on which the map view will be centered.


Zoom In Changes the cursor into a

magnifying glass, which you can use for zooming in on the map.

Zoom Out

Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass, which you can use for zooming out on the map.

Clear Route

Clears the measurement route from the map. This button is active only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.

Set Current Location

Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. That this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot be used during playback.

Auto Center

With the Auto Center tool activated, the map view will always center on the test vehicle. This requires that a GPS receiver is used.

Auto Center Sensitivity

The Auto center sensitivity slider defines in percentages the sensitivity of the activated Auto Center tool. The higher the percentage, the sooner the map is centered on the test vehicle when it moves around on the route.

Previous View

Click the Previous View button to return to the previous map view, for example, if you have moved the map with the Pan tool.

Entire Map Click the Entire Map button to

display the entire map after zooming in.

Entire Route

With the Entire Route button you can view the whole route on the map.

Scale Bar Activate the Scale Bar button to

view a scale bar in the map window.

Measure Distance

With the Measure Distance tool you can measure the distance on the map in kilometers between multiple points.


Side Panel Activate the Side Panel button to

view the side panel in the map window.

SHORTCUT KEYS 339

SHORTCUT KEYS

This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. This window can be displayed

by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.


NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS

Below are described the default notification symbols.

Attach Attempt

MMS Receiving Attempt

Attach Failed

MMS Receiving Failed

Attach Success

MMS Receiving Success

MMS Sending Attempt

Call Alerting

MMS Sending Failed

Call Answered

MMS Sending Success

Call Attempt

Call Connected

Packet Call Attempt

Call Disconnect

Packet Call Connected

Call Dropped

Packet Call Disconnected

Call Failed

Packet Call Failed

Call Received

Packet Technology Changed to HSDPA

Packet Technology Changed to UMTS

Cell Change Attempt

PTT Idle

Cell Change Failed

PTT Receiving

Cell Change Success

PTT Transmitting

Cell Reselection

Cell Reselection (3G) GSM/UMTS

RX Level Low/Bad

Cell Reselection (2G) UMTS/GSM

Routing Area Update Attempt

Routing Area Update Failed

Context Activation Attempt

Routing Area Update Success

Context Activation Failed

Context Activation Success Semiduplex Call Attempt

Context Deactivation

Service Lost

NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS 341

Service Received

Data Call Attempt

Data Connection Attempt

SMS Received

Data Connection Failed SMS Receiving Attempt

Data Connection Success SMS Receiving Failed

Data Disconnect SMS Sending Completed

Data Transfer Attempt

Data Transfer Success Soft Handover Failure

Data Transfer Failed Soft Handover Success

Dead Reckoning in Use TX Power High/UL Power Up High

Detach

Differential GPS in Use Video Call Attempt

Duplex Call Attempt Voice Call Attempt/Voice Call Attempt (ETSI)

FER High Voice Call Connected (ETSI)

Voice Call Disconnected (ETSI)

GPS Fix Lost Voice Call Dropped (ETSI)

GPS Fix Received

HS-DSCH Serving Cell Changed

Star

Thumb Down

Handover Attempt Thumb Up

Handover Failed

Handover Success

Location Area Update Attempt

Location Area Update Failed

Location Area Update Success


Marker

Markov Call Attempt

Measurement Error

NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT 343

NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT

If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo Outdoor, please contact our

Nemo Outdoor technical support service at [email protected] or call +358 50 395 7800.

Note that for full support you need to have the Maintenance Agreement.

INTERNET SUPPORT

At our web site http://www.anite.com/nemo, you can find all the frequently asked questions about

Nemo Outdoor, among other information.

USER CLUB

The Nemo User Club offers several new ways to benefit from Nemo products. You can find it at our

WWW site http://www.anite.com/nemo.

Access to the Nemo User Club is restricted to customers with SW maintenance and Technical

Support agreements or partner agreements. If you are an existing Anite Finland customer with SW

maintenance and Technical Support agreements, but you are without access to the user club, please

complete an on-line registration form.

After submitting the requested information, you will receive a personal access key and password by

email in a few days time.

Once you are registered with our User Club, you will automatically receive e-mails informing you

each time a new version of software for your Nemo Product is released. It is fast, easy, and it is

available to you seven days a week, 24 hours a day. If you have questions relating to the Nemo User

Club, please e-mail us at [email protected].

PHONE, EMAIL, AND FAX SUPPORT During the warranty period, the phone and fax support related to potential software errors is free of

additional charge. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full support.

When faxing or emailing, please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and Support

Agreement.


Please contact us at the following locations:

Global Email [email protected] Tel. +358 50 395 7800 Fax +358 8 551 6182 Address Anite Finland Ltd

Kiviharjunlenkki 1 D 90220 Oulu Finland

Americas Email [email protected] Mobile +1 469 951 9105

+1 469 774 4608 (En español e português) Fax +1 972 462 1640 Address Anite Inc.

6225 N. State Hwy 161 Suite 425 Irving, TX 75038 USA

APAC Email [email protected] Tel. +65 9746 2431 Fax +65 6254 9885 Address Anite Singapore Pte. Ltd.

101 Thomson Road, #20-05 United Square Singapore 307591

P.R. China Email [email protected] Tel. +86 10 6567 8528 Fax +86 10 6567 8521 Address Anite Wireless Trading (Beijing) Limited.

Room 2109, 21st Floor The Exchange Beijing, No. Yi 118, Jianguo Road Chaoyang District, Beijing 100022 China

When contacting us for problem reporting, please supply/inform us of:

Your Windows® version number (e.g., Windows® XP), see Windows® Control Panel | System

Your computer brand model (e.g., Lenovo)

Your test mobile types (e.g., Nokia 6720)

GPS receiver type (e.g., Garmin GPS II Plus)

Your Nemo Outdoor version and build (e.g., Version 5.xx.x), see Help | About

Device handler versions

Your description of the problem

Whether you were able to repeat the problem

The corresponding measurement results file (as email attachment or on disc)

APPENDIX 1 345

APPENDIX 1

INSTALLING A PCMCIA SERIAL I/O CARD

This appendix describes how to install a PCMCIA serial I/O card to create additional COM ports for

your computer. If you are using a USB serial converter, see the setup guide included in the converter

product package.

To install a PCMCIA serial I/O card:

1. Plug the PCMCIA I/O card into the computer’s PCMCIA slot.

2. If you have not installed the I/O drivers, the computer notifies you that it has found new hardware.

Proceed with the update hardware wizard as your computer suggests.

3. When the update is complete or if you have installed the I/O drivers earlier, select Start | Settings |

Control Panel | PC Card (PCMCIA). You should now be able to see the installed driver and the

COM port it is using. The COM port number is important, as you need to define it in the Nemo

Outdoor configuration settings.

4. Restart your computer.

Use the COM ports created with the PCMCIA serial card for GPS receivers and/or scanners. If

possible, always use the fixed COM ports of your computer to connect the test devices.


APPENDIX 2 You can have three kinds of Socket cards: single, dual, and Quad. After you have installed the dual

socket card drivers, you can check the COM ports from My Computer | Control Panel.

APPENDIX 2 347

By double-clicking on the Socket Dual I/O icon the Socket Dual I/O Properties dialog is opened.

The First Port Name and Second Port Name display the COM ports used by the socket card (in this

example COM3 and COM6, respectively).

The ports can be used for connecting the GPS receiver and the Scanner.

CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER TO A PCMCIA SOCKET

This appendix describes how to connect the GPS receiver to the computer when using PCMCIA

socket.

To connect the GPS receiver to the computer’s PCMCIA socket:

1. Plug the PCMCIA I/O card into the computer’s PCMCIA slot.

2. If you have not installed the socket I/O drivers, the computer notifies you that it has found new

hardware. Proceed with the update hardware wizard as your computer suggests.

3. When the update is complete or if you have installed the socket I/O drivers earlier, select Start |

Settings | Control Panel | PC Card (PCMCIA). You should now be able to see the installed driver

and also the COM port it is using.

4. If you need to restart your computer, do it at this point. After restarting, plug the GPS receiver in to

the PCMCIA card cable.

5. Start Nemo Outdoor. Open the Configuration Manager dialog and detect the GPS receiver either

manually or using the Autodetect function.


APPENDIX 3

MAKING MAPINFO® RASTER MAPS

Using raster image files, you can bring paper maps, photographs, and other graphic images into

MapInfo®. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps you

create in MapInfo®. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file, you can display it in a map

window.

Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support .TIF, .GIF, and .JPG formats. MapInfo® can read the

following types of raster images:

- filename.TIF

- filename.GIF

- filename.JPG

- filename.PCX

- filename.BMP

- filename.BIL

Color options are:

- Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white.

- Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black, white, or a shade of gray.

- Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors. MapInfo® supports

256 colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze, we recommend using gray scale

images. By doing this, the measurement route can be discerned better than with color map

images.

Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo® SW

If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image, then you must register the raster map

image so that MapInfo® can position it properly in a Map window. You do this in the Image Registration

Dialog. You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the raster image map. It is

important to provide accurate control point information when registering a raster map image. Choose

control points that can be easily identified and selected, such as street intersections or use the

coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a paper map.

To register a raster map:

1. Start the MapInfo® software. Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format. Select

your raster map image file (.TIF, .GIF, .JPG) and open it. The Image Registration Dialog is

displayed. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen.

2. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. If you do not know

the right projection, the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.

APPENDIX 3 349

3. Start adding control points. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). The Add Control

Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels. Add Map X and Map Y

coordinates in decimal formats. For example, to specify the coordinates 65 degrees, 30 minutes,

enter 65.5 degrees. Use negative numbers when specifying west and south coordinates. If you

want to register a raster map that does not use longitude and latitude coordinates, specify the

appropriate projection in the Image Registration Dialog. Enter your coordinates in the native units

of the coordinate system. For example, if you are registering a UTM map image, enter coordinates

in meters. Using the MapBasic® program, you can convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal degrees

format, or the conversion from d/m/s to decimal degrees is as follows:

degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal degrees

4. You must choose at least three control points. Select points that can be easily identified and

selected in the map window.

5. After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration dialog. The raster

map will be displayed in the map window.

6. Move filename.tab and filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor or Nemo

Analyze.

7. Open filename.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.


APPENDIX 4

CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR

You can access CDMA Settings and the PRL editing dialog in Nemo Outdoor through Device

Settings .

In the NV items page you are able to read and write nonvolatile memory items.

You need to know your SPC before you can program any of the following settings. A known SPC can

also be overwritten by this plugin.

Directory number defines a phone number

APPENDIX 5 351

MIN1 defines a seven-digit phone number of the terminal

MIN2 defines a three-digit area code

SPC defines the service programming code

IMSI = IMSI_MCC + IMSI_11_12 + MIN1 + MIN2

On the PRL page you can read and write PRL items. This can be used to load any previously saved

PRL’s onto any Qualcomm-based mobile. You can also use this feature to save a PRL from a

connected phone and then use this later to load the same PRL onto a new mobile.

On the DIP Switch page you are able to enable/disable the listed features.


Should you need to manually edit a PRL, you can use the Presto tool which can be downloaded from

CDG.org. The download page can be accessed by searching for “prl” using the search tool on the

main page.

1. Click on the prltools.asp link to get to the downloads page.

2. From there you can download the toolbar suite and the tutorial for it. Install the suite when

launched. This will add a tool bar called “Presto” to MS Excel.

APPENDIX 5 353

3. Run the Setup.exe file. Click Install in the dialog that appears.

4. Click Next in the PRL Toolbar Suite dialog that appears.

5. Click Next in the Welcome window.

6. Select I Agree in the License Agreement dialog, and click Next.

7. Click Next to confirm installation.

8. Click Close to exit the Installation Finished dialog.

9. Next, open Presto by going to Start | All Programs | QUALCOMM PRL Toolbar Suite |

PRESTO. It should look as follows in Excel:


APPENDIX 5

NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI CONFIGURATION

Please note that if you are running multi data measurements on a Windows 7 laptop, it is

recommended to run Nemo Outdoor as administrator. Right-click the Nemo Outdoor shortcut or

item in the Start menu and select Run as administrator.

The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact benchmarking solution to be used with Nemo

Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on different system technologies and

networks with support for up to seven test devices such as mobiles, scanners, and a GPS device, and

the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of

measurement modes such as voice calls and data transfers simultaneously while connected to a

single laptop.

All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing

a car’s +12VDC power output. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack

which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the

measurements. With the high-quality Neutrik USB connectors and the professional lockable USB data

cable connection the system is very reliable to use, preventing loose connections between test

devices and the main unit. Nemo Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional ruggedized roll-

around carrying case. The system is by default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to

be semi-permanently mounted into a test car. The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine

wave power inverter to supply power for the laptop.

Nemo Outdoor Multi can be delivered with or without the carrying case. These two options are

elaborated on below.

APPENDIX 5 355

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Nemo Outdoor Multi comes in two options: with or without the case. With the carrying case option, all

of the common components listed below will be included. When Nemo Outdoor Multi is delivered

without the case, only some of the common components will be included in the package.

Common Components

Carrying case

Mobile holder panel, test terminals

The mobile holder panel is by default attached to the lid of the multi carrying case, but can also be

semi-permanently mounted into a test vehicle, for example, on the car back seat.


MMAC3 unit

The MMAC3 unit is placed on the bottom layer of the carrying case, or it can also be used without the

carrying case. In the latter instance, see page 363.

Mounting plate

The MMAC3 unit is attached to the mounting plate and placed either in the multi carrying case or

alternatively can be attached to a location in the test vehicle.

APPENDIX 5 357

Mascot 12V Pure Sine Wave Inverter

The inverter provides power for the laptop on which Nemo Outdoor is running, or alternatively for an

Anritsu scanner or for any other device which uses the 110 or 220 voltage. The inverter converts +12V

into +110V or +220V depending on the requirements of the market area. The operating voltage of the

inverter is a constant +12V. The inverter should be connected directly to the car battery.

Note that the inverter should be taken out of the carrying case when in use, or it may overheat!


Power cables

Nemo Outdoor Multi comes with four external power cables. Two of the cables (1,2) are meant for the

Multi carrying case and two for the MMAC3 unit (3,4). The MMAC3 cables are only needed if you want

to mount the MMAC3 unit into the car instead of keeping it in the carrying case. If the MMAC3 unit is

placed in the carrying case, it is directly connected to the connector panel of the multi carrying case.

Both the carrying case and the MMAC3 unit have one cable to attach the unit to the car 12V socket,

and one cable for fixed installation in the test vehicle.

Product code Cable External power cable

description

1046-C-025

Length: 4m (13.12 ft)

Function: Enables the

Multi carrying case to be

connected to the car 12V

socket. The cable is

equipped with a Neutrik

lockable connector.

1041-C-040

Length: 5m (16,40 ft)

Function: used when

multi carrying case unit is

used for fixed installation

in a test vehicle. The

cable is equipped with a

Neutrik lockable

connector.

1041-C-038


Function: is used to

connect the MMAC3 unit

to the car 12V socket

when you want to use

the MMAC3 without the

carrying case.

APPENDIX 5 359

1041-C-039


Function: You can use

this external power cable

for the MMAC3 unit for

fixed installation in a car

in instances when you

want to use the MMAC3

unit without its carrying

case. The car 12V

socket provides a

constant +12V.

Laptop

The Nemo Outdoor Multi system runs on a single laptop with Nemo Outdoor installed on it. The laptop

is connected to the sine wave power inverter. The power inverter converts 12V to 110V or 220V

depending on the requirements of the market area.

Optional components

Scanner

It is possible to use one PCTEL EX or PCTEL EX mini scanner at a time with Nemo Outdoor Multi. If

the scanner has been delivered with the carrying case, it will come mounted into the case, and

connected to the MMAC3 USB port. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor WCDMA Scanner User Guide

for more details.


USB Soundcard for Voice Quality measurements

If you have purchased a TerraTec USB sound card with your Nemo Outdoor Multi, please refer to the

Voice Quality guide for further instructions.

External antennas

The external antennas can be placed on the middle panel which has a special magnet board to keep

them in their place. When Nemo Outdoor Multi is delivered with the carrying case option, it is possible

to use external antennas.

MMAC3 WITH CASE

When Nemo Outdoor Multi is purchased with the carrying case, all of the common components

mentioned above are included. The optional components remain optional, so not part of the default

package.

The MMAC3 carrying case consists of three main parts: lid, top level and bottom level. The test

terminals are mounted onto the terminal holder panel, and a middle panel divides the case into two

parts.

Lid

The case lid holds the mobile holder panel. However, the mobile holder panel can alternatively also be

removed from the lid and semi-mounted, for example, onto the test vehicle back seat. When attached

to the lid, the mobile holder panel is covered with soft padding which has openings for the test

terminals, and grooves on the inside leading the cables into the case and to the MMAC3 unit.

APPENDIX 5 361

The mobile holder panel can support up to six test terminals which can be secured in place with the

help of Velcro tapes. The Nemo Outdoor application supports up to five test mobiles at the time of

printing this manual.

Note that the lid must always be open when performing measurements, or otherwise the system

may overheat.

Connector Box

The MMAC3 POWER switch turns on the MMAC3 unit. Most of the time it is recommended that

both the MMAC3 POWER and the MAIN POWER switches are turned on when the Multi system is

in used.

The MAIN POWER switch turns on the Multi system when it is connected to either the car +12V

socket or the car battery. The switch also provides power for the optional scanner. Both the MAIN

POWER and MMAC3 POWER switches must be turned on when the Multi system is in use. If only

MMAC3 POWER switch is turned on, MMAC3 unit uses its internal back-up battery. The back-up

battery is intended for short power failures. However it makes it possible to measure up to

approximately 45-60 minutes without external power supply.

The MMAC3 USB connector is connected to the laptop USB port with a USB data cable. Please

remember to connect the data cable to same USB port in the laptop after its initial installation. The

MMAC3 unit with the test terminals and other devices connected to it are connected to the

MMAC3 USB connector’s other end underneath the connector box. This way the MMAC3 unit with

its devices are connected to the car power source and with the laptop

PWR CONNECTOR is meant for the Nemo Outdoor Multi main external power cable. There are

two cables available in the system, depending on whether it is to be connected to the car 12V

socket or to the car battery.

The USB EXT1 and USB EXT2 connectors are meant for external devices such as the GPS

devices, the optional scanner or optional USB soundcard for Voice Quality measurements.


Carrying case

The Multi measurement system comes divided into two levels by a middle panel.

Bottom level

Below the middle panel you will find the following items:

1) MMAC3 unit

2) Optional USB soundcard for voice quality measurements

3) Optional scanner

4) Test terminal car chargers

5) Lockable USB bushings for the test terminal data cables

Top level

The top level holds the following items:

1) Mascot DC to AC 12V pure Sine Wave Inverter for the laptop

2) Magnet board for external antennas.

3) Straps for holding cables in place during the transportation of the carrying case. The straps can be tightened.

APPENDIX 5 363

4) You can lift the middle panel by the handles on the left- and right- hand sides of the carrying case.

Note that you should use separate cigarette lighter sockets in the car for the MMAC3 multi unit

and for the laptop, otherwise the car fuse risks burning.

MMAC3 WITHOUT CASE

The MMAC3 unit can also be delivered on its own, without the case. In this case the components

included in the package are as follows.

MMAC3 unit

The MMAC3 unit is placed on the mounting plate. See below.


Mounting plate

Belt

The belt holds the MMAC3 unit in its place on the mounting plate.

Note that the belt is no longer included in the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi package.

USB A to USB B data cable

APPENDIX 5 365

External power cable

Screws

USB bushing


Mobile holder panel

Item Code

1. MMAC3 unit MMAC3

2. Mounting plate 1041-P-00

3. Belt 1041-P-01

4. USB-A to USB-B cable 3 m -

5. External power cable 1041-C-038

6. Screw DIN 7985 M4x16 -

7. Hex Nut DIN 985 M4 -

8. Screw DIN 7981C 4.2x16 -

9. USB bushing 1041-P-033

10. Mobile holder panel 800-0324-818

APPENDIX 5 367

IN-VEHICLE SETUP & INSTALLATION

Without Carrying Case The graph below shows the different components of the MMAC3 system.

Compiling the MMAC3 system

1. Attach the screws (see above, 6. Screw DIN 7985 M4x16) in the holes shown below. This enables

you to attach the MMAC3 unit on a surface in the test vehicle.


13. Place the MMAC3 box into the mounting plate.

14. The MMAC3 unit is now ready to be used once all the cables and test devices have been attached

to it.

APPENDIX 5 369

With Carrying Case

Note that the lid of the carrying case must be open at all times when the system is in use,

otherwise it may risk overheating!

Below you will see the system in a graph.


Compiling the MMAC3 system

1. Open the case locks. There are a total of six locks on three sides of the carrying case. Lift the clasp

and turn it to open the case.

15. Connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system to a power source in the car. There are two ways of

connecting the Multi system to a power source in the car: either to the car 12V socket or to the car

battery. These two options are listed below.

a) Non-fixed installation

You can connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system to the car 12V socket using the external power cable

with the code 1046-C-025 (see cable 1 on p. 358.). Connect the plug of the power cable to the PWR

CONNECTOR in the connector box. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector, and push and

turn the grey part of the plug until it locks to place. Next, connect the cigarette lighter end of the cable

to the car 12V socket. When you want to remove the cable from the connector box, lift and turn the

grey part of the plug until it is released, and pull it out.

APPENDIX 5 371

b) Fixed Installation

You can connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system directly to the vehicle battery. Connect the cable

plug (code 1041-C-040) to the PWR CONNECTOR in the connector box. Adjust the plug to fit the

grooves in the connector, and push and turn the grey part of the cable until it locks to place. When you

want to remove the cable from the connector box, lift and turn the plug until it is released and you can

pull it out. Attach the other end of the cable to the car battery.

16. Connect the possible optional USB devices such as GPS, second scanner etc to the USB EXT1

and USB EXT2 connectors.

17. The GPS antennas are placed on the vehicle roof in order to maximize the RF qualities of the

antenna. The middle panel contains an iron board which is meant for the antennas. Antennas

should be installed as symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the roof corners

and roof windows, and two wavelengths from each other.

= c / f

c = 300E6 (m/s)

f = frequency (Hz)

450 MHz = 66 cm (25.98”)

800 MHz = 37 cm (14.56”)

900 MHz = 33 cm (12. 99”)

1800 MHz = 17 cm (6.69”)

1900 MHz = 16 cm (6.29”)

2100 MHz = 14,5 cm (5.7”)

GPS antenna 1565- 1575 MHz = 19 cm (7.48”)

With a GPS antenna, distance from the corner is not important. However, especially within the

following frequency range 1800- 1900 MHz, the mobile antennas can interfere with the GPS receiver.


Place all antenna away from roof racks or any other obstructions. Bring the cables from the antennas

into the vehicle. Be careful not to pinch the cables with metal parts in any way that would damage

them.

It is possible to use external antennae with the carrying case, in which event the antennas are

attached directly to the test terminals.

18. Place the middle panel back in the carrying case. Take the Mascot DC to AC power inverter out of

the carrying case and place it on a steady surface in the vehicle. Connect the power cable that

came with it directly to the car battery.

19. Turn on the Multi system. The MMAC3 Power switch provides power solely for the MMAC3 unit.

The Main PWR switch provides power for the whole system when the system is connected to the

vehicle.

Green light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that it is using the external +12V power source.

Red light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that it is using the internal back up battery power

source.

Yellow light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that the voltage level is too low to operate. Low

voltage can occur if the power source cannot supply enough power to all devices connected to the

multi carrying case.

When the light is off, it means that the device is off, or that it is on but the internal backup battery

is empty.

APPENDIX 5 373

20. Connect the PC to the MMAC3 USB connector using the B data cable. Attach one end of the data

cable to a port in the laptop and the other to the MMAC USB port. Windows will automatically

recognize the device. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware, where you should be able to

see the Generic USB Hub under Universal Serial Bus controllers.

21. Connect the test terminals to the MMAC3 box and to the laptop. Check that each phone has a SIM

card in it and that the battery is in place. See the phone’s manual for further instructions on how to

do this.

22. If the system was purchased without a laptop it is recommended to install all required drivers for

all test devices. All drivers can be found on the CD that comes with the delivery. Connect the test

terminals to the USB connectors in the MMAC3 unit one by one. Especially when the installation

process is done for the first time, it is a lot easier to handle the installation process one terminal at

a time. Please refer to the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further instructions on how to

connect each phone to the computer (via the MMAC3 unit) and on how to set up a dial-up

connection and add the device to Nemo Outdoor on the laptop. Once installation with the first

terminal is done proceed with next one until all terminals and test devices are installed. If the

optional scanner is included and reassembled inside the carrying case, install also the driver that

comes with the scanner before connecting the USB data cable to the laptop.

23. Each phone’s USB cable is secured in a bushing which keeps the data cable securely in place.

The bushing is closed with screws, and the USB cable inserted in the USB connector in the

MMAC3 unit. When tightening the screw the USB cable with the bushing is locked in place to the

MMAC3 unit.


Removing data cable with USB bushing from MMAC3

1. Unscrew the Torx screw.

2. Pull out the screw and pull out the top part of USB bushing. After that, pull out the data cable from

the USB port. Next, pull out the lower part of the USB bushing and store the parts to a secure

place for future use.

Installing data cable with USB bushing to MMAC3

1. Plug in the USB data cable to a USB port in the MMAC3 unit.

2. Install the lower part of the USB bushing to the USB port, and press the data cable from the top so

that the data cable fits inside the lower part of the USB bushing as shown in the picture above.

3. Next, install the top part of the USB bushing to the USB port and if needed use a bit of force to

press it together with the lower part. Use a torx screw to tighten and lock the data cable to the

MMAC3 unit. Please tighten the screw as tight as possible till the connection is secure.

Note that these power sockets are meant solely for test terminal use, not for scanners! If a

scanner is connected with the socket, the fuse risks overheating.

4. The MMAC3 unit has six USB A connectors at the front for terminals, the GPS device and the

optional scanner. On the back side there are two USB connectors: one USB B connector which is

already connected to the MMAC3 USB connector in the connector panel, and the other which is a

USB A connector meant primarily for the optional scanner. However, it can be used for other USB

devices as well. The optional soundcard can be connected, for example, to the laptop. See the

Nemo Voice Quality Guide for further instructions on how to set up the voice quality system. The

MMAC3 unit is connected to the laptop through the MMAC3 USB connector in the connector

panel. If you have purchased an optional scanner, please refer to the Nemo Outdoor WCDMA

Scanner User Guide for instructions on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor.

5. Nemo Outdoor Multi is now ready to be used for measurements.

APPENDIX 6 375

APPENDIX 6

NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE MANUAL

Please note that if you are running multi data measurements on a Windows 7 laptop, it is

recommended to run Nemo Outdoor as administrator. Right-click the Nemo Outdoor shortcut or

item in the Start menu and select Run as administrator.

The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with

Nemo Outdoor. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and

networks with support for up to six test mobiles/USB modems, a scanner and a sound card. In

addition, the system in combination with the Nemo Outdoor Multi -option allows the use of different

combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls, voice quality calls and data transfers

simultaneously. The system is connected to a single laptop, saving space in the test vehicle during

drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Technical Specifications

Interfaces

One USB 2.0 compliant B port (In)

Seven USB 2.0 compliant ports (Out)

Main Power Switch/LED

Neutrik +12V Lockable Power Connector (NL2MP)

Complies with the following standards

300 019-2-5 V3.0.0 class T5.1 standard (random, bump and shock) vibration test

EMC test directive 95/54/EC, ECE regulation No 10/02 and ISO 7637-2 III


IP Rated: IP67

EN60529:1991

IEC60529:1989

Lockable USB data cable connections

Automatic Pressure Equalization Valve

Power Specification

Input: +12VDC nominal (11.3 - 15VDC range), max 8A

Outputs: +12VDC: 0.8A/socket or total 5A

Back-up battery capacity: Li-ion 2500 mAh

Configuration Operating mode Required

power (A) Note Input Voltage +12V DC

No devices Idle mode 0.35 Not charging Minimum operating voltage +11.3V

DC

No devices Idle mode 1.7 Charging

TerraTec Sound card connected 2.2

Charging phone x 1 One Nokia terminal

charged via car charger 2.85

Charging phone x 2 2 Nokia terminals charged

via car charger 3.45


via car chargers 4.05







No devices Idle mode 0.35 Not charging Minimum operating voltage +10.8V

DC (11.3V DC measured)

No devices Idle mode 1.7 Charging

TerraTec Sound card connected 2.2

Charging phone via USB x 1 One Nokia terminal

charged via USB port 2.7

USB data cable must be connected to

PC. Otherwise USB charging does not

work

Charging phone via USB x 2 2 Nokia terminals charged

via USB ports 3.2


via USB ports 3.7


via USB ports 4.2

Charging phone via USB x 5 5 Nokia terminals charged 4.7

APPENDIX 6 377

via USB ports


via USB ports 5.2

Measurement time with back up battery with sound card

and six terminals

~3.5

minutes

“Device not connected” appears in Nemo Outdoor UI.

Actual measurement time with back-up battery varies

depending on the voltage level of test terminals

Measurement time with back up battery without sound

card with six terminals

~20

minutes

“Device not connected” appears in Nemo Outdoor UI.

Actual measurement time with back-up battery varies

depending on the voltage level of test terminals.

Note that if the same power source is shared with Multi Lite and the PC, the power should

always be turned on first in the Multi unit, and only after that on the PC (e.g., if a +12V cigarette

lighter socket is used as power source).

Computer Requirements

PC (IBM or Dell recommended) with Windows® XP Professional (32 - bit) or Windows® Vista (32 -

bit)

For multi data and voice quality measurements Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or

higher

512MB RAM minimum, 1GB RAM recommended

100MB of free hard disk space for installation and use, 1GB recommended

For up to four channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo

processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher required

For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Quad Core

processor Q9100 2.26GHz or higher required


Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite System Components

Case

Pelican case 1520

Interior 45.9 x 32.7 x 17.1 cm

APPENDIX 6 379

(18.06" x 12.89" x 6.72")

Exterior 50.2 x 40 x 18.8 cm

(19.78" x 15.77" x 7.41")

Weight ~ 10.3kg (22.7lbs) (without test terminals and antennas)

Lid organizer

Place for CD, dongle, antennas, USB extension cable (max. 3m), etc.

Gas spring

Middle part

Place for up to six terminals

Fixed holders, 4 pcs

Movable holders with hinge, 2pcs

Fan


Bottom part

2500mAh back-up battery

PCB/Charger

Cigarette lighter sockets

Industrial seven port USB 2.0 hub (Digi Hubport 7C)

TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card (optional)

APPENDIX 6 381

Exterior

Carbine hooks (2pcs)

Optional components

Scanner

Sound card

Laptop with Nemo Outdoor

Note that from version 5.4 onwards, Nemo Outdoor requires a new dongle which cannot be

used with any previous versions of Nemo Outdoor.


Setting Up the System

Multi Lite first-time installation

Upon your purchase of the Multi Lite case and test devices, you will receive the system semi-

configured. This means that the data and audio cables as well as the optional sound card have been

set up for you, so there is no need for you to access the bottom part of the case.

However, you will need to set up and connect your test devices with Nemo Outdoor. The following

instructions will guide you through this process.

1. Open the case latches.

2. Insert the copy protection dongle attached to the case lid organizer to your computer.

3. Next, turn on the PC and run the Nemo Outdoor installation CD.

Note that you should make sure that the PC meets the computer requirements mentioned

above.

Note that prior to connecting the test devices to the PC, make sure that the drivers for the

terminal data cables, sound card and scanners have been installed. Refer to the Nemo Outdoor

Scanner Guide on page 453 and to the separate Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide

document for instructions. In the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide you will find terminal-specific

instructions regarding the drivers. At this point, only focus on driver installation. The dial-up

installation will be performed later on.

4. Connect the Multi Lite power cable to the power connector next to the power switch on the

connector panel. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector, push and turn it to the left until

it locks to place. Similarly, when you want to remove the cable connector from the connector

panel, lift and turn the grey part of the plug until it is released, and pull it up.

5. Connect the other end of the cable to the car +12V socket.

6. Connect the USB extension cable to the USB data cable coming from USB hub, and the other end

to the PC (max. 3m long) to the laptop.

7. Switch on the Multi unit from the connector panel. Even though the Multi unit can derive power

from the laptop, it is not powerful enough for uninterrupted power supply.

8. Attach the test terminals to their mobile holders one by one.

APPENDIX 6 383

Note that with Nokia N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97, N97US, 6720, and 6720US terminals, after

initial connection to a USB port, the terminal will always have the same COM ports.

Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements, it is recommended that you attach a label

with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected

to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the

terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure

reliability in audio measurements.

Holders 1-4 are reserved for Voice Quality measurements. For example, the voice quality cable

for terminal 1 will be attached to sound card audio connector line 1, the voice quality cable for

terminal 2 will be attached to sound card audio connector line 2, and so forth. See page 439 for

more information.

9. The layout of the mobile holder configuration is as shown in the image below.

10. Start Nemo Outdoor on the PC.

11. Connect the data cables to the test terminals one by one, and follow the dial-up connection

instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide. Note that the same terminal type can use the

same dial-up connection with Nemo Outdoor. Instructions for how to add the device in Nemo

Outdoor is included in the dial-up instructions.

12. Connect the chargers to the test terminals, and the other end to the +12V power sockets in the

Nemo Multi Lite connector panel. Note also that some terminals are charged via a USB port.


Note that only phones can be connected to the cigarette lighter sockets in the Multi Lite panel.

The scanner must at no time be connected to the +12V cigarette lighter socket. If a scanner is

connected to one of the sockets, the fuse risks overheating!

13. If you purchased a scanner, connect the scanner USB cable to the laptop. See Nemo Outdoor

Scanner Guide (see p. 453) for more information on how to connect the scanner with Nemo

Outdoor.

Note that the scanner data cable is connected to the laptop, not to the USB 2.0 hub at the

bottom of the Multi Lite case.

Note that the lid of the carrying case must be open at all times when the system is in use,

otherwise it may risk overheating!

14. In case you change your test terminals to a different model, or need to change data cables or

audio cables for any other reason, see below.

Changing Data Cables

1. Disconnect the terminals from the laptop and remove the data cables from the terminals by pulling

them out.

2. Use the hex key in the Multi Lite lid organizer pouch to unscrew and remove the middle panel in

the case. There are four screws (DIN 912 hex head screws) in the middle panel, and one screw

(DIN 912 hex head screw) on either side of the case for attaching mobile holders.

APPENDIX 6 385

3. After removing the screws in the middle panel, lift it from the right-hand side of the case when you

are facing it, and attach it to the case lid as shown in the picture sequence below.

1)

2)


4. After removing the middle panel, you will see the USB 2.0 hub (Digi Hubport 7C) in the upper

right-hand corner.

5. Turn the thumb screws as illustrated in the picture below to open and remove the hub clamp

cover.

3)

4)

APPENDIX 6 387

6. Move the hub in the direction shown by the red arrow and lift to remove the cover.

7. Once the cover is removed, you can remove the USB data cables.

8. Next, change the data cables for the new test terminals. If the data cable driver is different from

the one used earlier, remember to install the new driver before connecting the data cable to the

laptop. Consult the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions.

9. Place and screw the hub clamp cover back into place with the thumb screws, and push the USB

2.0 hub back into its original place.

10. Insert the data cables through the round PGSD-4 openings in the middle panel. They will be

connected to the terminals later on after the phones are attached to the mobile holders.

11. If you also need to change audio cables, proceed to the following section.


12. If you are done with changing cables, attach and screw the middle panel back into place.

13. You can now proceed with measurements.

Changing audio cables

1. If you have not already done it, remove the case middle panel as instructed above.

2. Remove the audio cables from the TerraTec sound card. Refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide

(p. 415) for more details regarding the sound card setup.

3. Start with measurements.

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite vs. Nemo Outdoor Multi

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Nemo Outdoor Multi

Max. number of terminals 6 6

Max. number of scanners 1 external 1 internal

Max. number of voice quality terminals 6 6

Pure sine wave inverter (300W) No Yes

Exterior dimensions 50.2 x 40 x 18.8 cm

(19.78" x 15.77" x 7.41" )

60.4 x 51.0 x 24.6 cm

(24.1 x 20.3 x 9.8")

Interior dimensions 45.9 x 32.7 x 17.1 cm

(18.06" x 12.89" x 6.72“)

55.3 x 45.2 x 20.8 cm

(21.9 x 18.0 x 8.4")

Weight (Multi Lite without terminals and antennas)

~10.3kg (22.7lbs) ~25kg (55lbs)

Carry-on luggage Yes* No

Back up battery (Li-ion 2500mAh) / charger Yes Yes

Industrial USB 2.0 hub, Digi Hubport 7C Yes Yes

Comply: 300 019-2-5 V3.0.0 class T5.1 standard vibration test

EMC test directive 95/54/EC, ECE regulation No 10/02 and ISO 7637-2 III

Yes Yes

Electrical parts between Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite and Nemo Outdoor Multi are identical including USB

hub, PCB, charger, back-up battery, and the TerraTec sound card

* Max. allowance varies depending on air lines

APPENDIX 7 389

APPENDIX 7 - VOICE QUALITY GUIDE

Nemo Voice Quality is an option for the Nemo Outdoor measurement system. Nemo Outdoor supports

mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. The measurements enable the

assessment of the quality of voice during voice calls as perceived by end-users. The measurement is

based on the ITU-T recommendations P.862.1 and P862.2 and it produces a PESQ score that is

mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score) scale. Also measurements based on the WB-

AMR codec are supported. Nemo Outdoor supports voice quality measurements with three options:

with the Nemo Audio Module, the TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card and with the Maya44 USB

sound card.

The Nemo Voice Quality system with the Nemo Audio modules (EVOQs) consists of Nemo Outdoor,

1-6 mobiles, 1-6 audio modules, and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. EVOQ, i.e. the Nemo audio

module, runs in real-time on a DSP board. The supported technologies are GSM, WCDMA, and

CDMA2000. For a list of supported terminals, please see the Voice Quality data sheet.

The Nemo Voice Quality system with the TerraTec DMX 6 Fire USB sound card consists of

Nemo Outdoor, 1-4 mobiles, the TerraTec sound card, and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. It is

supported with the Nemo Outdoor platform, and it supports the USB 2.0 audio system, four

channels, and the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA technologies. For a list of

supported terminals, please see the Voice Quality data sheet.

The Nemo Voice Quality system with the Maya44 sound card consists of Nemo Outdoor, 1-4 mobiles,

the Maya44 sound card, and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. If you combine the TerraTec and Maya44

sound cards, you can connect up to 6 test terminals with Nemo Outdoor Multi.

With all options, the Nemo Audio Module (EVOQ), the TerraTec DMX 6Fire sound card and the

Maya44 sound card it is possible to perform two types of voice quality measurements, mobile-

to-mobile and fixed-to-mobile measurements.


In mobile-to-mobile measurements, one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test

sample. These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the transmitting terminal

and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.

Voice Quality mobile-to-mobile with the Nemo Audio Modules

Voice Quality with the TerraTec DMX 6Fire Sound Card

APPENDIX 7 391

In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements, a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is connected

to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option. These measurements present the downlink quality of the

terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end, the uplink quality of the terminal at the server end, and the

downlink quality of the receiving terminal.

Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile with the Nemo Audio Module

Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile with TerraTec DMX 6 Fire Sound Card


VOICE QUALITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Mobile-to-Fixed Line

When Nemo Outdoor calls a fixed line that is connected to Nemo Server, the server answers the call

and Nemo Outdoor/EVOQ/sound card audio module starts sending the configured test sample. The

server records 1.5 seconds of incoming audio, after which it compares the recorded sample and

chooses the best matching sample from the default samples unless sample forcing is not used on

server side. After the identification, the server sends the identified, non-degraded sample to Nemo

Outdoor that records it and calculates the PESQ score (MOS DL). Along with the test samples, short

synchronization tone is sent. They are used for synchronization purposes and do not affect the PESQ

score. The synchronization tone is always sent from the side which sends the audio sample. For

example, with mobile-to-fixed-line testing synchronization tone is sent first from the mobile/

EVOQ/sound card audio module to the server.

After receiving the test sample, Nemo Outdoor sends the same sample to the server. This time the

server recognizes the sample, records it for the duration of the identified sample, calculates the score

(MOS UL), opens a measurement file, and stores the result there. The measurement file on server

side is closed when the line is dropped, or after a user-defined time that can be adjusted via the Nemo

Server Manager application. The test goes on alternating until a call drops, or until Nemo Outdoor or

Nemo Server ends the call. If the server does not detect the line drop, e.g. when busy tone detection

has not been performed, it takes up to 30 seconds for the server to hang up the line automatically.

APPENDIX 7 393

Mobile-to-Mobile

The same logic is used also in mobile-to-mobile testing as with mobile-to-fixed line.

Note that the synchronization algorithm has been changed for the EVOQ audio module. The

change and description above applies to firmware version 2.8 and Nemo Server 2.0.0, and later.

PSTN lines of Nemo Server must be calibrated before use.

Busy call detection wizard of Nemo Server must be done before use.

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – NEMO AUDIO MODULE (EVOQ)

Setting Up the System

This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality measurement

system. Please install the Nemo Outdoor software first. Refer to the Nemo Outdoor user manual for

detailed instructions.

Terminal-Specific Hardware for Voice Quality Testing

The image below exemplifies the voice quality module and cable setup.

In the following four parts, the terminal-specific cables will be listed, and the setup exemplified with a picture.


Note that all audio cables need to be inserted with the red dot facing upwards.

Product Code Product Name Configuration

100244-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia terminals compatible with CA-86US v.2 data cables including:

-6230i, 6630, 6680, N75 and N80. -If the number of terminals exceeds two, also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required.

1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) 4) Nokia DKU-2/CA-86US v.2 audio/ data cable (420008-00) -Ground Type: Differential -Ground (425000-01)

Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice

quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture.

1)

2)

3)

4)

APPENDIX 7 395


100245-00

Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia N95 series terminals including: Nokia 95 and Nokia 95US. If the number of terminals exceeds two, also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required.

1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) 4) EVOQ, RCA Female- Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02)



1)

2)

3)

4)



100246-00

Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia 3500 and 612x series terminals. Included are

Nokia 3500, 6120 and Nokia 6121. If the number of terminals exceeds two, also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required.

1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) 4) EVOQ, RCA Female- Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) 2.5mm 4-P-RCA male audio cable (420042-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02)



1)

2)

3)

4)

APPENDIX 7 397


100247-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG LHD-200E terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more, also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.

-1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) 425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ, RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02)

100248-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8000 terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more, also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.

-1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ, RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02)

100249-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8100 terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.

-1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ, RCA Female- Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02)

100250-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8300 terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more, also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.

-1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle


(426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ, RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02)

100255-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG- KX 206 terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more, also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.

-1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ, RCA Female- Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02)

1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm- 3.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) 3) EVOQ, RCA Female- Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00)

Note that the WHITE RCA female connector must be connected to RED RCA male connector,

and that the YELLOW RCA female connector must be connected to the WHITE RCA male

connector.

1)

APPENDIX 7 399



The following section will provide information on how to connect the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi

device.

Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device

When there are two or more audio modules in use, the Nemo Outdoor Multi device is required for

measurements. This chapter describes the installation of the MMAC2 Multi device.

There is a status led at the back of the Multi unit which will blink red, amber, or green. Please observe

the led during installation and use as it will indicate whether the Multi unit is working properly or not.

Red: This light signifies the loss of USB communication with the host. If the loss is due to

unplugging the unit, the light will blink red a few times before turning green when it is reconnected.

Otherwise, the light indicates a problem with the (Edgeport/8) drivers, which may need to be

reinstalled. The red will also blink during installation until the installation is complete.

Amber (orange): This light signifies serial port activity on the MMAC2 (Edgeport/8). The amber

light may also flash briefly during installation.

Green: This light indicates that the serial ports are successfully set up and the MMAC2

(Edgeport/8) is operating normally.

Installing and connecting the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi device:

1. Before connecting the Multi device to your computer, insert the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-

ROM disk with the Edgeport/8 driver file into the CD-ROM drive.

2. Switch on the computer. Switch on power in Multi holder from the power switch at the back of the

Multi unit.

3. Connect the USB cable to the Multi holder and the other end to your computer. Windows will detect

the USB hub automatically.


4. Windows will detect the new Edgeport/8 device. Drivers are found on the Nemo Outdoor

installation CD-ROM. Click Yes in the Digital Signature Not Found dialog if it appears. Windows®

2000 may find many new devices. Wait until the process is finished.

5. Go to the Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel. Double-click on System and in the

Hardware tab click the Device Manager button). Double-click on Ports. There should be eight

new COM ports. If not, start from the beginning.

Port numbers are arranged so that the port marked as Port1 on the multi device is the first of

the new COM ports (e.g., COM49), Port2 is the second new COM port (e.g., COM50), etc.

APPENDIX 6 401

Connecting Voice Quality Devices - MMAC2

Please complete the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi installation first as the Voice Quality devices

are connected to the COM port provided by the Multi mobile holder.

1. As described in the Multi device set-up, there are eight new COM ports. Connect the trace cable

between the audio module and the MMAC unit. Insert plug A in a serial port on the MMAC unit and

plug B on the connector marked COM on the audio module.

Port numbers are arranged so that the port marked as Port1 on the multi device is the first of

the new COM ports (e.g., COM49), Port2 is the second new COM port (e.g., COM50), etc.


2. Use the three-headed DKU-2 trace/audio cable to connect the test terminal and the audio module.

Insert plug A to the test terminal, plug B to a free USB port on your computer/MMAC unit, and

plug C to the connector marked Phone on the audio module.

APPENDIX 6 403

3. Connect the power cable between the audio modules and the MMAC unit. Insert the A plugs to the

connectors marked Power on the audio modules and B plug in the front panel of the MMAC unit. A

green led should light up.

4. Start Nemo Outdoor. In the Configuration Manager, click Add and select the device. The Phone

Properties dialog is opened.


5. Select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. You can check the

ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and

Modem Options, Modems tab). Select the port with the smaller number as the modem port and

the port with the bigger number as the trace port, e.g., COM59 as trace port and COM58 as

modem port.

6. In the VQ Device Port, select the COM port where the serial cable of the audio module is

connected. For example, the serial cable is connected to port number 4 in the Multi unit (in the front

and middle). Go to the Device Manager. Under Ports you see eight Edgeport items. Count to the

fourth item and check the COM port number, COM52 in the example below.

APPENDIX 6 405

7. Do not select anything in the Dial-Up Connection fields.

Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. If you have several mobiles

and audio modules, make sure that you select the correct ports for each mobile + audio module

combination.

Remember to check that the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is at minimum. Make a

test call and adjust the terminal headset volume to minimum (or to second highest level with

N95 and other ‘2.5/3.5mm jack plug’ headset connected terminals). Switch off alert and warning

tones. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score.

8. Click OK. The test terminal will start and initialize the audio module. You are now ready to start the

measurements.


Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi device

When there are two or more audio modules in use, the Nemo Outdoor Multi device is required for

measurements. This chapter describes the installation of the MMAC3 Multi device.

Note that with Nokia N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97, N97US, 6720, and 6720US terminals, after

initial connection to a USB port, the terminal will always have the same COM ports.






The graph below illustrates the MMAC3 Multi option without the carrying case.

APPENDIX 6 407

The graph below illustrates the MMAC3 Multi system with the carrying case option.

There is a status led at the back of the Multi unit which will show green, red, yellow or no light

depending on the power usage of Nemo Outdoor Multi, as described below.

Green light indicates that the MMAC3 unit is on and that it is using the external +12V power

source.

Red light indicates that the MMAC3 unit is on and that it is using the internal back-up battery

power source.

Yellow light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that the voltage level is too low to operate. Low

voltage can occur if the power source cannot supply enough power to all devices connected to the

multi carrying case.

When the light is off, it means that the device is off, or that it is on but the internal backup battery

is empty.

Installing and connecting the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi device:

1. Before connecting the Multi device to your computer, insert the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-

ROM disk into the CD-ROM drive.

2. Switch on the computer. Switch on power in Multi from the power switch at the back of the Multi

unit.

3. Connect the USB cable to the Multi and the other end to your computer. Windows will detect the

USB hub automatically.


4. Go to the Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel). Double-click on System and in the

Hardware tab, click on the Device Manager button). Double-click on the Universal Serial Bus

Controllers item. You should be able to see the Generic USB Hub item.

For instructions on how to set up the MMAC3 system, refer to the Nemo Outdoor manual. However,

below you will find instructions on how to connect the voice quality devices with MMAC3 Multi unit.

APPENDIX 6 409

Connecting EVOQ audio modules with MMAC3

The voice quality system is shown below. The graph shows the system on the whole.


The following picture shows the setup with an MMAC3 Multi unit, the voice quality plate, three voice

quality (EVOQ) modules, an Edgeport, and one voice quality test mobile. Please refer to the Nemo

Server manual for information on how to connect the Voice Quality system with the server.

1. The voice quality plate is attached to the MMAC3 unit with screws (see the red arrows). The black

arrows above indicate the screws that go in the slots underneath the voice quality (EVOQ) box to

keep it in place.

2. Insert plug A of the serial cable in a serial port in the Edgeport box, and plug B in the COM port in

the voice quality (EVOQ) box. One end of the A to B data cable (C) goes to Edgeport, and the

other end to the laptop computer.

APPENDIX 6 411

24. The voice quality boxes are all connected to the back of the MMAC3 unit (D). The MMAC3 unit is

connected to a power source through a power cable (E). Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor

MMAC3 Multi manual for information on how to connect the MMAC3 unit to a power source.

25. Start Nemo Outdoor. In the Configuration Manager, click Add and select the device. The Phone

Properties dialog is opened.


26. Select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. You can check the ports

from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem

Options, Modems tab). Select the port with the smaller number as the modem port and the port with

the bigger number as the trace port, e.g., COM59 as trace port and COM58 as modem port.

27. In the VQ Device Port, select the COM port where the serial cable of the audio module is

connected. For example, the serial cable is connected to port number 4 in the Multi unit (in the

front and middle). Go to the Device Manager. Under Ports you see eight Edgeport items. Count to

the fourth item and check the COM port number, COM52 in the example below.

APPENDIX 6 413

28. Do not select anything in the Dial-Up Connection fields.

Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. If you have several mobiles

and audio modules, make sure that you select the correct ports for each mobile + audio module

combination.

Remember to check that the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is at minimum. Make a

test call and adjust the terminal headset volume to minimum (or level 4 with N95 and other

‘2.5/3.5mm jack plug’ headset connected terminals). Switch off alert and warning tones.

Beeping during a measurement will lower the score.

29. Click OK. The test terminal will start and initialize the terminal used with the EVOQ module, the

module needs to be modified accordingly. The terminals are either used by common ground

cables or differential ground cables. The table below shows the terminal model and ground type.

Terminal Differential Ground Common Ground Jumper J9 in place

Nokia terminals

6230i, 6630, 6650,

6651, 6680, N75, N80

Yes No

Nokia N95, Nokia 7376,

6120, 6121, 3500, 6720

Yes Yes

LG VX8X00 series Yes Yes

If the purchased voice quality system includes both differential and common ground terminals, the

EVOQ modules are by default set for differential ground.


Disassembling the EVOQ Module

1. Remove the cover from EVOQ module by unscrewing the four M4*6 screws.

2. Remove the pc board from the box by unscrewing the screws shown in picture 2.0. Make sure you

are ESD protected to avoid damaging the pc board.

3. Install jumper J9 in place as shown in the picture below.

APPENDIX 6 415

Assembling the EVOQ Module

Place the pc board back into the box and tighten the screws. Place the cover on top of the box and

tighten the screws.

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – TERRATEC SOUND CARD

Nemo Voice Quality – TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Technical Data

USB 2.0 audio system

1 microphone input with gain control (combo XLR / 6.3 mm jack)

48V phantom power

-20 dB pad switch

1 instrument input with gain control (6.3 mm jack)

4 analogue inputs (cinch)

1 phono input (RCA cinch) with RIAA equaliser and gain control

6 analogue outputs (cinch)

Stereo to 5.1 Surround Expander

1 headphone jack (6.3 mm) with separate volume controller

1 optical digital input/output (TOS Link)

1 coaxial digital input/output (cinch)

1 MIDI interface In/Out (5-pin DIN)

24 bit / 192 kHz A/D converter with 114 dB (A) SNR* (input 1/2)

24 bit / 192 kHz A/D converter with 105 dB (A) SNR* (input 3/4)

24 bit / 192 kHz D/A converter with 114 dB (A) SNR* (outputs 1-6)

WDM driver for Windows XP SP2 / Vista

ASIO 2.0 support

Control panel for Windows XP SP2 / Vista

System Requirements

o 2.0 GHz Intel or AMD CPU

o Windows XP SP2 or Windows XP X64 or Windows Vista or Windows Vista X64

o 512 MB RAM

o 1 free USB 2.0 port

o CD/DVD drive


Scope of delivery

o DMX 6Fire USB

o Power supply

o USB cable 1.8m

o 1 Adaptor (6.3mm 3.5mm mono)

o 1 Adaptor (6.3mm 3.5mm stereo)

Setting up the system

This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality measurement

system. Please install the Nemo Outdoor software and the DMX 6Fire USB driver first.

Note that it is very important for the laptop to fill the hardware requirements stated above; the

laptop needs to have Core Duo Processor 2.0 GHz or AMD PCU, or more powerful.

Installing the DMX 6Fire USB Driver in Windows XP

Do not connect the USB connectivity cable to your PC until the driver installation is complete.

However, power can be switched on in the sound card.

1. Before you start, ensure that your Windows XP version is up to date. Right-click the My Computer

icon and choose Properties from the context menu. The System Properties dialog appears, in

which you can check your current service pack version. You can also enter the System Properties

dialog by going to Start | Settings | Control Panel | System. It is important for Windows XP

Service Pack 2 (SP2 for short) or Windows Vista to be installed on your computer. If this is not the

case, please contact Microsoft (www.microsoft.com) to update your system. For Windows, this is

generally free of charge.

2. The driver installation file is found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD in Nemo Outdoor\Drivers

and Specific Softwares\TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card driver. Please note that this specific

version of the driver needs to be used.

3. Double-click on the installation file. The installation wizard will now display its welcome message.

APPENDIX 6 417

4. The default destination for the installation is specified in the following window. If you prefer another

folder, select Browse... and choose the corresponding directory. Then, click Install.

5. You can disregard the safety warning without concern. Click Continue Anyway to continue.

6. The driver is now installed in the system, and as soon as the message below appears, you can

connect the DMX 6Fire USB to your computer's USB 2.0 port using the cable provided. If Nemo

Multi hardware is used, sound card can be connected also to the Multi unit. Windows XP will

automatically recognize the device as new hardware and open the driver installation dialogue.


7. The Windows Found New Hardware Wizard asks what driver to use for the new hardware

component. You do not have to search for the driver online. The next window asks about the

driver for the DMX 6Fire USB hardware. Next, select Install the software automatically

[Recommended] and confirm with Next.

8. Then, just to be safe, a new system restore point is set. Nothing to be concerned about—this is a

standard precaution.

9. This concludes part 1 of the installation, so click Finish.

10. This returns you to the installation wizard, as only the drivers for the USB controller have been

installed; now, the drivers that make the controller a USB audio device are installed. Here, too,

select Install the software automatically to install the second batch of drivers.

11. Again, you can safely ignore the message that the software did not pass the Windows Logo test.

12. Click Finish to complete the installation of the drivers.

APPENDIX 6 419

13. Once the drivers have been installed, the DMX 6Fire USB should appear in the device manager

with the following entries. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware and click the Device

Manager button.

14. After installation remember to check that the GAIN1 and GAIN2 controls are adjusted to the

minimum and the PAD switches are in the OFF position in the TerraTec Sound Card front panel.

15. Note that the volume level of the test terminals needs to be adjusted according to the table below

during a voice call:

Terminal Volume level

Nokia 3500, 6120, 6121, N85, N85 US, N95, N95

US, N96, N96 US, N97, N97US

8 / 10

Nokia 6720(US), C5 10/10

LG C680 3 / 8

LG KX206, C676 4 / 7

LG VX8350, VX8360 8 / 8

Datang DTM 8120 2 / 5

Huawei C7600 7 / 7

Leadcore LC 8130E 2 / 5

Samsung SGH-U800 3 / 7

16. Start TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Control Panel from Start | TerraTec | DMX6FireUSB.


17. From the control panel set the settings as in the screen shots below. Remember to also pay

attention to the bottom part of the panel.

18. Input settings:

Set Input ½ and Input ¾ levels to +5dB

Set the Waveplay ½ and Waveplay ¾ levels to -5dB (with Datang and Leadcore: -13dB, and with

Samsung SGH-U800: -5db -> -10db)

Unset all routing buttons at the bottom of the panel except set Waveplay 1/2 routing to 1/2 and

Waveplay 3/4 routing to ¾

Note that the volume on the Datang 8120 and Leadcore LC 8130E needs to be adjusted to level 2

(2/ 5) during a voice call. With the Datang 8120 and Leadcore LC 8130E terminals the TerraTec

control panel settings are different from other terminals. If the system is used simultaneously with

other terminals, unset the LINK buttons below the input/waveplay settings and you can change

waveplay settings by channel. This way you can adjust the waveplay settings separately for the

Datang terminal without affecting CDMA or GSM/WCDMA terminals.

19. Output settings:

Set all Output levels and Master to 0dB

APPENDIX 6 421

20. From Miscellaneous | Asio | Asio Latency, select Maximum (8.0ms 384 samples) and close

the Asio Latency window. Now you can start Nemo Outdoor. You can leave the DMX control panel

open or close it.

Note that if there is a system that measures acceleration in the laptop and which causes the

hard disk to stop when jolted, it should be turned off. Otherwise there may be breaks in the

measurement files.

21. With the Lenovo T61 laptop you can turn this system off by going to Start | ThinkVantage

Productivity Center and selecting Security | Protection and Recovery | Protect my hard-drive [ ]

Enable Active Protection System.

22. Next, in Nemo Outdoor add a terminal by going to Measurement | Add New Device | Phone In

the Phone Properties dialog select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and

Modem Port. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start |

Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options, Modems tab). Select the port with the

bigger number as the modem port and the port with the smaller number as the trace port, e.g.,

COM100 as trace port and COM101 as modem port. Next, select the Sound card channel item.

You will see a list of numbered options from channel 1 onwards. Select the channel based on to

which LINE IN and LINE out jack you connected the audio cable in the sound card. You do not

need to select anything in the dial-up connection fields unless you are also performing data

transfers. In this case please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for

further information.


23. Select Measurement Properties | Voice number | Properties. Refer to page 105 for more

information on voice quality settings.

24. Click OK in the Measurement Properties dialog. You are now ready to perform voice quality

measurements.

Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. If you have several mobiles,

make sure that you select the correct channel for each mobile.

Note that if you are using more than two mobiles for voice quality measurements, Nemo

Outdoor Multi is needed. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi manual in Appendix 5

for information on the Nemo Outdoor Multi system.

Note that when you are using a separate 300W inverter, it is recommended that the computer

and sound card be connected to the inverter prior to starting measurements. For example, if the

computer is connected to the inverter during a measurement, it is possible that it causes a

temporary supply voltage disconnection. This further risks an interruption in the reception of

MOS values.

APPENDIX 6 423

Required Hardware with TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card

Note that the USB sound card can handle the maximum of four terminals simultaneously

Note that only one USB sound card can be connected to the computer at a time

Note! If terminals report lower than expected MOS values in Voice Quality measurements, it

may result from too high CPU usage on the computer. First of all, an Intel® Core Duo processor

T2500 2.00GHz or higher is required for voice quality measurements. If you suspect that the

reported MOS values are too low and you are using multiple terminals and a scanner

simultaneously, try the following. First, if you have many applications running on the laptop, try

closing the unnecessary ones. Next, disconnect the scanner and try testing with a single

terminal to see if the MOS values improve. Proceed with testing with 1-4 terminals without

using the scanner simultaneously for optimal MOS results.

TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card


100256-01

Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0

sound card

NOTE! Use this code

only when voice quality

system is sold with

Nemo Outdoor Multi

(100149-00 or 100243-

00) or without multi

hardware.

With Nemo Multi Lite

use code 100318-00

1) 1 x Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0

sound card with required accessories

including:

-Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 sound

card

-USB A to B data cable

-220V power supply

-Terratec DMX 6Fire USB driver

(427001-00)

-Inverter Mascot 2285 12V/ 220V

300W for sound card and computer.

ELFA 69-715-27 (499048-02)

-Inverter Mascot 9984 12V/ 220V

150W for sound card. ELFA 69-717-09

(499048-05) -PWR Cable for Inverter

(4m) (499048-03)

-Extension cord for sound card ELFA

42-223-76

(419009-00)

-Flat head screw driver 3,5mm ELFA

80-361-47 (499048-04)

-Terratec Cover 1180-p-030 (427001-

01)

-Terratec Strain Relief 1180-p-

031(427001-02)

-Line Mic4 adapter (427000-01)


Note that when used in a vehicle, the sound card should only be used with the two power

inverters provided by Anite Finland. The Mascot 2285 inverter is meant to be used with the

sound card and the laptop. The Mascot 9984 inverter is only meant to be used with the sound

card. It is not recommended that other devices be connected to it to ensure sufficient power

supply. In case of overload the user risks receiving erroneous measurement results.

Note that the GAIN1 and GAIN2 controls need to be adjusted to the minimum, and the PAD

switches need to be in the OFF position in the TerraTec Sound Card front panel.

At the back of the TerraTec Sound Card:

The power cable is connected to the POWER connector and the other end of the power cable is

connected to the inverter.

The A to B USB cable is connected to the USB connector, and the other end of the cable is

connected directly to the laptop.

Note that the A to B USB cable should be connected directly to the laptop! Do not connect the

cable to the multi hardware (if used).

The red RCA lead is connected to LINE IN 1 and the black RCA lead to LINE OUT 1. When there

are more than one test terminal in use, the terminals always take up the same number in both

LINE IN and LINE OUT.

Nokia N85(US)/N95(US)/N96(US)/6720(US), N97(US)


100257-02 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality

with Nokia N95, N95US, N96

and N96US

Includes:

1) 1 x RCA cable extension

leads (male-female) (420046-

00)

APPENDIX 6 425

2) Audio cable CA-75U

included in the terminal sales

package.

100257-03 Voice Quality with Nokia N85,

N85US, N97, N97US, 6720

and 6720US.

Includes:


leads (male- female) (420046-

00)

2) 1 x audio cable CA-75U

(420047-00)

The yellow audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter (1) and the white audio connector to

the red RCA lead. The red RCA lead will be connected to LINE IN X and the black RCA lead to LINE

OUT X connector. Note that the red audio cable (CA-75U) connector will remain unused.


You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card, as shown below. In

this case the white audio connector is directly connected to the applicable Line In connector in the

sound card, and the yellow audio connector to the line mic adapter. The red audio cable connector will

remain unused.

Note that the volume on the Nokia N85/N95/N96/6720/N97 needs to be adjusted to level 8 during

a voice call.

Nokia 3500 and 612X


100258-01 N612x/3500 audio cables/

adapter package.Nokia 6120,

6121 and Nokia 3500.

Includes:


leads (male-female) (420046-

00)

2) 1 x 2.5mm 4- pin- RCA

male audio cable (420042-00)

3) RCA male audio cable

(420042-00)

The yellow audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter and the white audio connector to the

red RCA lead. The red RCA extension lead will be connected to the sound card’s LINE IN connector

and the black RCA extension lead to the LINE OUT connector.

APPENDIX 6 427


this case the white audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the

sound card, and the yellow audio connector to the Line mic adapter.

Note that the volume on the Nokia 612X and 3500 needs to be adjusted to level 8 during a voice

call.


LG CDMA/VX8350/VX8360/Huawei C7600 (EVDO)


100259-01 CDMA audio cable/adapter package for LG C680, LG C676, LG KX206, LG KX256, LG VX8350/VX8360 and Huawei C7600.

Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm-3.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (420045-00)

Note that the volume on LG C680 needs to be adjusted to level 3 (3/8) during a voice call.

Note that the volume on LG C676 and KX206 needs to be adjusted to level 4 (4/7) during a voice

call.

Note that the volume on the Huawei C7600 terminal needs to be adjusted to maximum level (7/7)

during a voice call.

Note that the volume on the LG VX8350 and VX8360 terminals needs to be adjusted to the

maximum (8/8) during a voice call.

The red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card,

and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter (colors visible on the inside of the connectors).

APPENDIX 6 429

Datang DTM 8120/ Leadcore LC 8130E


100260-01 Datang DTM 8120/ Leadcore 8130E audio cable/adapter package.

Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm-3.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (420045-00)

The red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN/ANALOG IN connector in the

sound card, and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter which is connected to the sound

card LINE OUT/ANALOG OUT connector(s) (colors visible on the inside of the connectors). Below you

see examples for both the TerraTec and Maya sound cards.


You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the sound card.

APPENDIX 6 431

Note that the volume on the Datang 8120 and Leadcore 8130E terminals needs to be adjusted to

level 2 (2/ 5) during a voice call. With the Datang 8120 and Leadcore 8130E terminals the

Terratec control panel settings are different from other terminals. If the system is used

simultaneously with other terminals, unset the LINK buttons below the input/waveplay settings

and you can change waveplay settings by channel. This way you can adjust the waveplay

settings separately for the Datang terminal without affecting CDMA or GSM/ WCDMA terminals.


Samsung SGH-U800


100259-02 Nemo Outdoor Samsung audio cable/adapter package for the following Samsung models: SGH-U800

Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm-3.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (420045-00) 3) Samsung S20-Pin Multi-Adapter 2.5mm AAET554CBEBSTD (419004-01)

Note that the volume on the Samsung SGH-U800 terminal needs to be adjusted to 3 / 7 during a

voice call.

The white (see inside the connector) audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter and the red

audio connector to the red RCA lead. The red RCA extension lead will be connected to the sound

card’s LINE IN connector and the black RCA extension lead to the LINE OUT connector.

APPENDIX 6 433


this case the red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the

sound card, and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter.

TERRATEC DMX 6FIRE SOUND CARD WITH NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI

Below you can see a graph illustrating the Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality system with the TerraTec

DMX 6Fire Sound Card and with Nemo Outdoor Multi.

Note that with Nokia C5, N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97, N97US, 6720 and 6720US terminals,

after initial connection to a USB port, the terminal will always have the same COM ports.







If Nemo Multi Lite hardware is used, place the terminal(s) to holder(s) screen facing down.

Note! If terminals report lower than expected MOS values in Voice Quality measurements, it

may result from too high CPU usage on the computer. First of all, an Intel® Core Duo processor

T2500 2.00GHz or higher is required for voice quality measurements. If you suspect that the

reported MOS values are too low and you are using multiple terminals and a scanner

simultaneously, try the following. First, if you have many applications running on the laptop, try

closing the unnecessary ones. Next, disconnect the scanner and try testing with a single

terminal to see if the MOS values improve. Proceed with testing with 1-4 terminals without

using the scanner simultaneously for optimal MOS results.

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – MAYA44 USB SOUND CARD

Technical Specifications

4 input channels and 4 output channels with RCA connectors

-10dBV input / output level (unbalanced)

optical S/PDIF digital output with Miniplug connector

headphone output (1/8" connector) with 60mW amplifier

ASIO 2.0 and CoreAudio support (4 inputs / 4 outputs)

MME / WDM support (2 inputs / 2 outputs)

standard USB connection to PC

compatible with Windows 2000, XP and Vista

compatible with all major DJ software applications

compatible with all major professional audio applications

compact, portable and lightweight design

Note that for voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo processor

T2500 2.00GHz or higher is required

Note that it is very important for the laptop to fill the following hardware requirements: the

laptop needs to have Core Duo Processor 2.0 GHz or AMD PCU, or more powerful.

Note that the USB sound card can handle the maximum of four terminals simultaneously

Note that only one Maya44 USB sound card can be connected to a computer at a time. However,

sound cards from other manufacturers can be connected simultaneously to the same laptop

with Maya44.

APPENDIX 6 435

Maya44 sound card components


Installing the Maya44 USB Connectivity Driver

Do not connect the USB connectivity cable to your PC until the driver installation is complete.

However, power can be switched on in the sound card.

1. The driver installation file is found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD in Nemo Outdoor\Drivers

and Specific Softwares\Maya44 USB driver.

2. Double-click on Setup.exe to start the installation.

3. Choose the language of your preference, and click OK.

4. Click on Install the driver.

5. Select I accept the agreement in the License Agreement dialog, and click on Install.

6. A dialog appears suggesting you connect the Maya sound card to a USB slot in your PC.

7. The installation wizard may prompt you to remove and reconnect the sound card. In such a case,

do as instructed.

8. Windows should automatically detect the Maya44 sound card.

9. Click Exit in the Installation finished dialog.

APPENDIX 6 437

10. The driver installation is now finished.

11. Once the drivers have been installed, go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware and click

the Device Manager button. The AudioDevice on USB Bus 2.8.7 and Maya 44 2.8.7 items should

appear under Sound, video and game controllers, and Universal Serial Bus controllers,

respectively.


12. Next, connect your test terminals to Maya sound card. From the picture below you will see the

right configuration. The line mic adapter goes to Analog Out, and the White cable to Analog in.

The numbering in Analog Out and Analog in should be the same for each terminal. For example,

terminal 1 will take up Analog Out 1 and Analog In 1 connectors.

13. Next, go to the installation folder and click on Maya44Panel.exe.

14. If the device is not connected, the following dialog appears.

15. If the device is connected, the following control panel dialog appears. Configure the settings as in

the image below.

16. And below the Input and Output settings clarified.

APPENDIX 6 439

17. Hence, set the Input settings slide control to between 7 and 8, and the Output slide control all the

way up as in the image.

18. Set the Monitor In 1+2 and 3+4 to mute.

MAYA44 SOUND CARD WITH TERRATEC DMX SOUND CARD AND NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI

Below you can see a graph illustrating the Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality system with the Maya44 and

TerraTec DMX 6Fire sound cards, and with Nemo Outdoor Multi or Nemo Multi Lite. Up to 6 test

terminals can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi with this configuration.

Note that with Nokia C5, N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97, N97US, 6720, and 6720US terminals,

after initial connection to a USB port, the terminal will always have the same COM ports.







If Nemo Multi Lite hardware is used, place the terminal(s) to holder(s) screen facing down.

Note that a Quad-core computer must be used with voice quality measurements if the number

of VQ terminals is more than four.

When using Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with TerraTec and Maya44 sound cards, four VQ terminals

are connected to TerraTec and two VQ terminals to the Maya44 sound card. The TerraTec sound card

is located at the bottom of the Multi Lite casing. The Maya44 sound card can be placed on the middle

panel as shown in the image above. During transportation it can be placed in the pouch at the bottom

of the case lid.

APPENDIX 6 441

MAKING VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS

After software installations and hardware setup you are ready to start the measurements. You will

receive some default test samples along with Nemo Outdoor but if you wish to use your own samples,

please read the requirements below.

Test sample requirements:

8kHz sampling rate

16-bit linear PCM

signal scaled to 90% of full scale

band-pass filtered with corner frequencies at 250Hz and 3500Hz

minimum duration of each sample: 2 seconds

maximum duration of each sample:

o EVOQ module: 6 seconds

o TerraTec sound card: 10 seconds

Server-side limitations that do not affect mobile-to-mobile testing are:

maximum of nine samples total in server test-sample folder

the first 1.5 seconds have to be different in each sample

Mobile-to-Mobile VQ Measurements

Making mobile-to-mobile voice quality measurements:

1. Connect the Nemo audio modules and test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system

(see page 40).

Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements, as it may impair

sample flow from the terminal.

Remember to check that with the EVOQ audio modules the audio (earphone) level of the test

mobile is set to level 4 or to the second highest level with N95. Make a test call and adjust the

terminal headset volume. Switch off the alert and warning tones. Beeping during a

measurement will lower the score.

Remember to check that with the TerraTec Sound Card the audio (earphone) level of the test

mobile is set according to the table below:



Nokia 3500, 6120, 6121, N85, N85 US, N95, N95 US,

N96, N96 US, N97, N97US

8 / 10

Nokia 6720(US), C5 10/10

LG C680 3 / 8

LG KX206, C676 4 / 7

LG VX8350, VX8360 8 / 8


Huawei C7600 7 / 7

Leadcore LC 8130E 2 / 5

Samsung SGH-U800 3 / 7

2. Define the voice quality settings for the first mobile, i.e., the mobile that you are calling from.

3. Open the Measurement Properties, Script dialog for the first mobile (Measurement | <device> |

Script Properties). Click on the Script Editor button to create a new script.

4. In the Script Editor, click Add and select Voice Call from the menu.

APPENDIX 6 443

5. In the Voice Call Properties dialog:

Define the phone number of the second mobile, i.e., the mobile that you are calling.

Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback command to

Nemo Server using DTMF tones.

Select the Voice quality option.

Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Click OK.


6. In the Script Editor dialog, double-click on the End a voice call item to define whether end

command type is normal or forced. Define how many times you would like to repeat the script by

editing the Repeat Script parameter.

7. Click Save and type a file name for the script. Finally click Close.

8. Define the voice quality settings for the second mobile, i.e., the mobile that you are calling to.

9. Open the Measurement Properties dialog for the second mobile (Measurement | <device> |

Measurement Properties).

APPENDIX 6 445

10. In the Measurement Properties, Configuration dialog, click the Properties button next to the

Voice Number field.



Define the phone number of the first mobile, i.e., the mobile that you are receiving calls from.

Select the Voice quality option

Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback command to

Nemo Server using DTMF tones.

Define a Prefix for the received files. The prefix will be added at the beginning of the file name of

all received files.

Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Select the same

file as for the other mobile. Click OK.

12. Open a line graph for viewing the voice quality data. Select Data | Line Graph | New.

13. An empty line graph window opens. In the Parameters view type audio in the filtering field at the

top of the view. Select the audio parameters, and drag them in the graph window. Each parameter

is shown as its own layer in the Layers view.

APPENDIX 6 447

14. Click the Start Recording button. Click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. Nemo

Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements.

Mobile-to-Fixed-to-Mobile VQ Measurements

Please complete the Nemo server installation before continuing. See Appendix 1 for detailed

instructions.

Making mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements:

1. Connect the Nemo audio modules and test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system

(see page 40).

Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements, as it may impair

sample flow from the terminal.

Remember to check that with the EVOQ audio modules the audio (earphone) level of the test

mobile is set to level 4. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume. Switch off the

alert and warning tones. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score.


Remember to check that with the TerraTec Sound Card the audio (earphone) level of the test

mobile is set according to the table below:


Nokia 3500, 6120, 6121, N85, N85 US, N95, N95

US, N96, N96 US, N97, N97US

8 / 10

Nokia 6720(US), C5 10/10

LG C680 3 / 8

LG KX206, C676 4 / 7

LG VX8350, VX8360 8 / 8


Huawei C7600 7 / 7

2. Define the voice quality settings in the Voice Call Properties dialog:

Select one of the default test samples. Make sure that the server has the same samples in its

reference sample folder (see Nemo Server installation guide for details).

Set the time between calls parameter to one minute.

3. If you are using scripts, click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. Nemo Outdoor will

run through the script and make the voice quality measurements.

4. If you are performing measurements manually, select Start Voice Call from the Measurement

menu or by clicking the Device Commands button. With each voice call, the voice quality

measurement is run.

5. Define the voice quality settings for the mobile.

APPENDIX 6 449

Open the Measurement Properties, Script dialog for the mobile (Measurement | <device> |

Script Properties).

Click the Script Editor button to create a new script.

6. In the Script Editor, click Add and select Voice Call from the menu.



Define the phone number of the fixed end, i.e., the server that is answering the calls and sending

back the samples.

Select the Voice Quality option.

Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Please make sure

that the same reference file exists also on the server. Click OK.

8. In the Script Editor dialog, define how many times you would like to repeat the script by editing

the Repeat Script parameter.

APPENDIX 6 451

9. Click Save and type a file name for the script. Finally click Close.

10. Open a line graph for viewing the voice quality data. Select Data | Line Graph | New.

11. An empty line graph window opens. In the Parameters view type audio in the filtering field at the

top of the view. Select the audio parameters, and drag them in the graph window. Each parameter

is shown as its own layer in the Layers view.


12. Click the Start Recording button. Click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. Nemo

Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements.

SCANNER GUIDE 453

APPENDIX 8 - SCANNER USER GUIDE

CONNECTING DEVICES

Connecting Nemo FSR1 Scanner

Nemo FSR1 scanner is powered by 10 to 16 VDC. AC operation for the standalone

receiver is achieved by using the optional AC power supply. The AC power supply is

designed to work with 100 - 240VAC 50/60Hz. For other voltages or line frequencies

contact Anite for the correct supply.

The standard AC supply is rated at 130 Watts. Actual power requirements will vary

depending number of downconverters installed and the receiver tasking. The

maximum power requirement of the scanner is 50 Watts.

DC operation for the standalone receiver can be achieved by connection to a vehicle

12-volt system. The following table is provided to budget the system current

requirements for various configurations.

Platform configuration/Module 12 VDC current requirement

Basic system w/ single downconverter 3.0 A

Two downconverter system 3.6 A

The estimates given for the scanner assume maximum utilization of the processing

capabilities.


Connecting the Nemo FSR1:

1. Connect an antenna cable to scanner RF input. If you are measuring with two

downconverters, connect an antenna in both RF inputs (see picture below).

2. Connect Ethernet cable(s) to the scanner Ethernet port(s) and to the Nemo

Outdoor laptop.

3. Go to Control Panel | Network and Internet | Network and Sharing Center.

Click on Change adapter settings.

RF input RF input

GPS connector Status LEDs Ethernet ports Serial port

SCANNER GUIDE 455

4. Right-click on Local Area Connection and select Properties. In the Local Area

Connection Properties dialog, select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)

and click Properties.

5. Select Use the following IP address and type in the IP address of the scanner in

the IP address field. Click OK and Close.


6. Connect the power cable to the scanner and to a power source. Switch power on.

7. The default address and name settings of the scanner are generally suitable for

most users. There is no need to configure these settings when using the Nemo

FSR1 scanner with Nemo Outdoor.

8. The status LEDs at the front panel display how the scanner is functioning.

LED Name LED Color Description RxA Green Receiver A enabled

Amber Receiver A disabled i.e. EEPROM not readable RxB Green Receiver B enabled

Amber Receiver B disabled i.e. EEPROM not readable Status Green GPS Locked

Amber GPS Unlocked Active Green Ethernet link connected

Red Ethernet link disconnected All LEDs Amber If all four LEDs are amber, the bootloader is

running and the module needs to be reloaded

Connecting Anritsu Scanners

These instructions apply to all Anritsu scanners, except Anritsu MS2721B DVB-

H Analyzer.

1. Connect the antenna cable to scanner RF Input. If you are measuring with a dual-

mode scanner that supports both GSM and WCDMA, use the RF1 input (see

picture). RF2 input only supports WCDMA scanning.

Fuse

Power connector Power switch

Fans

SCANNER GUIDE 457

2. Connect the battery cable to the battery and to a power source.

3. The Battery led of the scanner should turn green.

The following steps apply to Anritsu ML8720B and ML8720C scanners. If you

are measuring with the Anritsu ML8740A or Anritsu ML8740B scanner, see step

12.

4. Connect the null modem cable to the scanner COM port that can be found below

the power switch.


5. Connect the null modem to one of the PC COM ports

6. Turn the power on in the scanner. The Power led should light up.

7. The scanner should now start, wait until the scanner has started

8. Press the Menu button in the scanner.

9. Use the arrow keys and the Sel button to select Interface and Behavior.

10. Check that the settings are as follows. If not, change them using the arrow keys

and the Sel button (note that the selected item will be underlined as soon as you

use the arrow buttons to switch to another line). To exit the dialog without saving,

press the F4 button (Cancel). To exit the dialog and save the modified settings,

press the F5 button (OK).

COM1 Protocol: Direct

COM1 Baud Rate: 38400 or 57600 or 115200

COM1 Stop Bit(s): 1

COM1 Data Length: 8

COM1 Parity: None

The baud rate 115200 is the fastest option.

Note! Memorize the baud rate. It is needed when starting the device.

11. If you are measuring with the Anritsu ML8740A or Anritsu ML8740B scanner, see

the following steps.

12. Insert the Anritsu installation CD in your PC.

SCANNER GUIDE 459

13. Connect the USB cable to the scanner USB port found in the front panel and to

the PC.

14. Switch the scanner on.

15. The New Hardware Wizard will start automatically. Select the No, not this time

option and click Next.

16. Select the Install the software automatically option and click Next.

17. If a warning message appears, click Continue Anyway. The installation will start.

Please wait while the New Hardware Wizard installs the software. When the

installation is complete, click Finish.


18. To check that the installation was successful, go to Device Manager (Start |

Settings | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager). Expand the

Universal Serial Bus controllers item. Area Scanner should be on the list.

19. Double-click on Area Scanner. Check that the Device Status field displays This

device is working properly. Exit the dialog by clicking OK.

SCANNER GUIDE 461


Connecting the Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H Analyzer/Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum Analyzer scanner

Installing the driver:

Please follow the following steps to install the NI-VISA 4.0 driver.

1. To install the driver the user must have administrative rights to its PC, and the

Take ownership of files or other objects policy has to be enabled for this user

on this PC.

2. Copy the executable file visa400full.exe to your local drive before installing the

driver, and run the installation from the hard drive.

3. Double-click on the file and unzip the contents to your hard-drive. This may take a

couple of minutes.

4. The installation starts automatically.

5. Click Next>> on the welcome page.

SCANNER GUIDE 463

6. Select the destination folder for the driver and click Next>>.

7. Click Next>> in the Features dialog.

8. Select I accept the License Agreement(s) in the following page and click

Next>>.

9. Click Next>> in the following dialog and wait for the installation to finish, and

Finish in the Installation Complete dialog. Note that you may need to restart your

computer for the installation to take effect.


10.Connect the scanner with your PC through a network cable. Insert one end of the

network cable in the network cable connector in the scanner, and the other end to

the network cable connector in your PC.

11.Next, you need to make some changes to your PC’s network card properties. Go

to Start | Control Panel | Network Connections, and right-click on Local Area

Connection, and select Properties. In the Local Area Connection Properties

dialog, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click on Properties. Select Use

the following IP address. You need to type in an IP address out of the range

192.168.0.11 - 192.168.0.14, as those addresses are reserved for the scanner.

Type in, for example, 192.168.0.10. Next, type 255.255.0.0 in the Subnet mask

field. Click OK and Close to exit the dialogs.

12. Next, start the scanner by pressing on the green On/Off button.

13. Press on Shift and then System (8) button on the scanner.

SCANNER GUIDE 465

14. On the menu to the right of the screen, select System Options | Ethernet

Config by using the grey buttons next to the screen.

15. Select the Set the IP Address Manually using the following Settings by

pressing the top-most grey button immediately under the Esc button.

16. Type in the same IP address for both IP and Gateway from those reserved for

the scanner (192.168.0.11 - 192.168.0.14). Here the selected IP address will be

192.168.0.14. You can move to different directions on the screen through the grey

buttons. If the Subnet field is not automatically filled when filling the IP and

Gateway fields, you can use, for example, 255.255.255.255 for it. Press Enter

and restart the device by clicking twice on the On/Off button.

17. When the scanner has restarted, start Nemo Outdoor. Go to Measurement | Add

device | Scanner, and select Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H or Anritsu MS2721B

Spectrum Analyzer. Click Next.

18.In the Scanner Properties dialog that appears, select one of Anritsu LAN 1-4

ports depending on which IP address you entered on the device. If you entered

192.168.0.11, select Anritsu LAN 1, if you selected 192.168.0.12, select Anritsu

LAN 2, etc. Since 192.168.0.14 was selected earlier, the Anritsu LAN 4 port will

be used here.

Note that the Baud rate, Antenna gain and Cable loss fields do not affect the

scanner, so they can be left as they are.

19. Click OK. See page 513 for more information on how to perform DVB-H

measurements. See page 514 for instructions regarding settings for the Spectrum

Analyzer.


Connecting the DRT Wimax 4301A+ Scanner

Note! The DRT 4301A+ scanner does NOT have an On/OFF switch. The unit is

powered by connecting the power cable and powered off by disconnecting the

power cable. When connecting cables to the unit, the power cable should be

the last one connected and the first one disconnected.

1. Insert one end of the RJ-45 cable in the DATA jack in the scanner, and connect

the other end with the PC.

2. Insert the power cable in the connector marked DC IN.

3. Plug the antenna cable in the FR IN B port in your DRT scanner.

Note that you can only select one of the antennas, 2300/2500MHz or the

3500MHz antenna, and connect it with the scanner. You must select between

the antennas at this point.

4. Connect the scanner’s GPS antenna cable to the scanner’s GPS port, and place

the GPS antenna on a visible spot.

5. Go to Start | Control Panel | Network Connections on your PC.

6. Right-click on Local Area Connection and select Properties.

7. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog, select Internet Protocol

(TCP/IP) | Properties.

SCANNER GUIDE 467

8. In the General tab, select Use the following IP address, and type 192.168.5.1 in

the IP address field, and 255.255.255.0 in the Subnet mask field.

9. Click OK and Close to exit the dialogs.

10. Now connect the scanner’s power cable. The scanner is now on. A green light will

turn on in the scanner.

11. Start Nemo Outdoor. Go to Measurement | Add New Device | Scanner. Select

DRT WIMAX 2300, DRT WIMAX 2500 or DRT WIMAX 3500 depending on which

band you choose to measure at the time.


12. In the Scanner Properties dialog, select DRT LAN in the Port drop-down menu.

Note that the Baud rate, Antenna gain and Cable loss fields do not affect the

scanner, so they can be left as they are.

13. Click OK to exit the dialog.

14. Go to page 537 for more information on conducting WIMAX measurements with

the DRT scanner.

Connecting the PCTEL LX CDMA/EVDO/GSM/WCDMA Scanner

1. Connect the antenna cable to the scanner RF Input.

SCANNER GUIDE 469

2. Connect the scanner GPS antenna cable to the scanner GPS input (above RF

Input).

3. Connect the scanner power cable to the scanner serial port (Data).

4. The scanner cable is split into a serial cable connector and a power cable

connector. Connect the serial cable to one of the COM ports in the PC. Connect

the scanner power cable to a cigarette lighter in the car.

5. When connecting the scanner power cable, check the Power led:

If the led is first orange for a while and then turns green, the scanner is

working properly and using a baud rate of 38400

If the led blinks orange and black for a while and then turns green, the

scanner is working properly and using baud rate of 115200


If the led is red, the scanner is not working properly. Switch the power off and

on again. If this occurs after usage, the device may be overheated. Let it cool

down for a while.

Note! Memorize the baud rate. It is needed when starting the device.

Connecting External GPS to PCTEL LX EVDO/GSM/WCDMA Scanner

Note that you cannot use both the integrated and an external GPS receiver at

the same time.

1. Connect the GPS serial cable to a PC serial port.

If there is only one port in the PC by default, this port should be reserved for

the scanner. In this case connect the GPS to the PCMCIA serial port adapter.

2. Connect the GPS power cable to a cigarette lighter.

Connecting PCTEL EX scanners

Installing the SeeGull EX VCP Device Driver

Please follow the following steps to install the VCP device driver.



on this PC.

2. Copy the folder /SeeGull EX VCP driver_v.2.0.0.46B to your local drive before

installing the driver, and run the installation from the hard drive.

Right click on the folder and select Properties.

Clear the Read-only attributes and click OK.

Select Apply changes to this folder, subfolder and files as below

and click OK.

3. Double-click on the SeeGull EX VCP Device Driver.msi installer file to start the

driver installation.

SCANNER GUIDE 471

4. Click Next in the SeeGull Welcome window that appears.

5. Select the destination folder for the driver in the Destination Folder window, and

Click Next, and click Install.

6. Click Finish in the InstallationShield Wizard Completed window to exit the wizard.

7. Remove the yellow plastic caps from the antenna, power and GPS connectors in

the front panel.


8. Connect the power cable to the Power connector in the front panel. Connect the

other end of the cable to a cigarette lighter socket. The SYS indicator in the front

panel will light up.

9. Connect the antenna cables. It does not matter which antenna cable goes to

which RF connector.

SCANNER GUIDE 473

10. Connect the GPS antenna to the connector marked GPS.

11. Connect the USB data cable to the USB port in the front panel. Connect the other

end of the USB data cable to your PC.

12. Windows will automatically detect the device.


Connecting the PCTEL LX GSM/WCDMA Dual-Mode Scanner

1. Remove the yellow plastic caps from the antenna and GPS connectors in the

front panel.

2. Connect the power cable to the Power and Data connector in the front panel.

Connect the other end to a USB port on your computer and to a power source.

The green Power indicator in the scanner front panel will light up.

SCANNER GUIDE 475

3. Connect the antenna cables. Note that the antenna cables and the connectors in

the scanner front panel are color coded. The OP042 cable marked with yellow is

connected to the RF1 connector marked with yellow (connector on the left). The

OP039 cable marked with blue is connected to the RF2 connector marked with

purple (connector in the middle).

4. Connect the GPS antenna to the connector marked GPS (connector on the right).

5. Windows will have detected the new device and will install the required drivers.

Insert the PCTEL installation CD.

6. Select No, not this time in the Welcome dialog.


7. Select Install from a list of specific location and click Next.

8. Select Include this option in the search and browse to folder

D:\EdgeportUSB\Edgeport Vendor Data\driver vx.x. Click Next to start the

installation.

9. When the installation is finished, click Finish. Windows will automatically install

some additional drivers and report when the device is ready to be used.

SCANNER GUIDE 477

Connecting the PCTEL MX GSM/WCDMA Scanner

Installing the SeeGull MX Device Driver

Please follow the following steps to install the device driver.



on this PC.

2. Browse to folder seegull mx driver\MX winusb driver. For 32-bit operating system

run DPInst.exe from “install x86” folder and for 64-bit operating system run

DPInst.exe from “install x64” folder.

3. The PCTEL USB Device Installer window will appear. Click Next.

4. If a Windows Security message appears, click Install.

5. Click Finish in the installation completed window.

6. Remove the yellow plastic caps from the antenna, power and GPS connectors in

the front panel.


7. Connect the power cable to the PWR connector in the front panel. Connect the

other end of the cable to a cigarette lighter socket. The Status indicator in the

front panel will light up.

8. Connect the antenna cables. The label on the scanner lists the frequencies of the

radio modules connected to each specific port, labeled RF1 to RF8. The antenna

ports that require antenna connections are identified by their “frequency” on the

label. Since each SeeGull MX is configured to minimize the number of ports

necessary for use, some ports may be inactive for a particular configuration and

are indicated by a blank box.

SCANNER GUIDE 479

9. Connect the GPS antenna to the connector marked GPS.

10. Connect the USB data cable to the USB port in the front panel. Connect the other

end of the USB data cable to your PC.

11. Windows Vista and Windows 7 will automatically detect and install the device.

12. With Windows XP a Found new Hardware window will appear. Select No, not

this time in the Welcome window. Select Install the software automatically

(Recommended) and click Next. Finally click Finish.

13. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager and select

Ports. Memorize the port number for the PCTEL Communications Port item, as

you will need it later on.

Connecting PCTEL PCT Scanners

Installing PL2303 Prolific DriverInstaller Driver

1. Run the PL2303_Prolific_DriverInstaller_vx.x.exe (x refers to the version number)

file on the installation CD.

2. Click Next in the Welcome window that appears.


3. Click Finish to finish the driver installation.

4. Next, remove the yellow plastic caps from the antenna and GPS connectors in the

front panel of the PCTEL PCT scanner.

5. Connect the antenna cable in the RF Input connector.

6. Connect the data cable to the Data connector. Connect the other end of the USB

data cable to your PC.

SCANNER GUIDE 481

7. Connect the power cable to the Power connector in the front panel. Connect the

other end of the cable to a cigarette lighter socket.

8. Windows automatically detects the new hardware.

9. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager and select

Ports. Memorize the port number for the Prolific USB-to-Serial Comm Port

item, as you will need it later on.


Connecting the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ/TSML Scanner

Note that your PC must have a FireWire (IEEE1394) port in it and a 32-bit PC

FireWire controller card for you to be able to connect a Rohde & Schwarz

TSMQ Scanner

Driver installation:

1. First, install the TSMxDriverInstall.exe file on the installation CD.

2. Click Run to run the installation file.

3. Click Next in the Welcome window that appears.

SCANNER GUIDE 483

4. Next, connect the antenna cable to the RF Input connector in the Rohde &

Schwarz scanner.

5. Connect the FireWire cable to one of the IEEE ports and the other end to your PC

or a FireWire adapter in the PC.


6. Next, connect the power cable to the DC IN connector and the other end to a

power source.

7. Windows automatically detects the new hardware. Select No, not this time and

click Next in the Welcome window that appears.

SCANNER GUIDE 485

8. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended), and click Next.

9. Click Finish to finish the installation.

10. Go to Device Manager from Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device

Manager. You should see the Rohde & Schwarz TSMx Devices item, and the

applicable Rohde & Schwarz scanner model under it.


Connecting the Rohde & Schwarz TSMW Scanner

1. First, connect antenna cables to the RF1 and RF2 input connectors. See chapter

System Priority Order with R&S TSMW Scanners on page 488 for information on

connecting the antennas to the correct ports.

2. Next, connect the network cable connector to the LAN connector in the scanner.

Note that the network port in the computer to which the cable is connected

should be at least 1 Gbps.

SCANNER GUIDE 487

3. Connect the power cable to the DC IN port in the scanner, and the other end of

the cable to a power source.Connect the power cable either to a Mascot power

supply, or with the applicable cigarette lighter adapter, to a cigarette lighter

socket.

4. Next, you need to make some changes to your PC’s network card properties. Go

to Start | Control Panel | Network Connections, and right-click on Local Area

Connection, and select Properties. In the Local Area Connection Properties

dialog, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click on Properties. Select Use

the following IP address. You need to type in an IP address within the range of

192.168.0.1 - 192.168.0.255. The default IP address for the scanner is

192.168.0.2, so it should be avoided. Next, type 255.255.255.0 in the Subnet

mask field. Click OK and Close to exit the dialogs.


5. In Windows 7, go to Start | Control Panel | Network and Internet | Network and

Sharing Center. Select Local Area Connection in the View your active

networks list. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog, select Properties. In

the Local Area Connection Properties dialog that opens, select the Networking

tab, and Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) in the This connection uses the

following items view. Click on Properties. Select Use the following IP address.

You need to type in an IP address within the range of 192.168.0.1 -

192.168.0.255. The default IP address for the scanner is 192.168.0.2, so it should

be avoided. Next, type 255.255.255.0 in the Subnet mask field. Click OK and

Close to exit the dialogs.

6. The device is now connected to the computer. See Starting Devices below for

information on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor.

System Priority Order with R&S TSMW Scanners

Multiple cellular technologies (systems) are measured in a parallel manner. The

different systems are arranged in a priority order as shown in Figure 4. The CDMA

and EVDO systems are counted as one system. Nemo Outdoor handles priority and

allocates the RF ports automatically. In this case priority refers to the order in which

systems are allocated to RF port #1 and RF port #2. The resource slot number

defines in how many processes one RF port is divided.

Both ports, RF #1 and RF #2, have 100% of available resources. When only one

system (except LTE) is measured, for example WCDMA, it is set to be measured via

RF port #1 with 100% of its resources. When two systems are measured

simultaneously, for example GSM and WCDMA, GSM has higher priority over

WCDMA. GSM is set to be measured via RF port #1 with 100% of its resources,

whereas WCDMA system is set to be measured via RF port #2 with 100% of its

resources.

When three systems are measured simultaneously, for example GSM, WCDMA and

CDMA, the systems are again allocated in the priority order for the two RF ports. In

this case RF port #1 is shared by two systems: GSM and CDMA. Each system gets

50% of the RF port #1 resources. 100% of RF port #2 resources are allocated to

WCDMA measurements.

With LTE, individual carriers are allocated to the two RF ports. For example, when

measuring two or more LTE carriers, carriers are arranged in order from lowest

frequency number to the highest. After that, carriers (frequencies) are allocated to

the RF ports so that the first carrier is allocated to RF port #1 and the second carrier

to RF port #2, third carrier is again allocated to RF port #1 and the fourth carrier to

RF port #2, etc.

If the measurement setup includes an odd number of other systems in addition to

LTE, the first LTE carrier is allocated to RF port #2. The second LTE carrier is

allocated to RF port #1, etc. However, if the measurement setup includes only one

other system in addition to LTE, the other system is allocated to RF port #1 and all

LTE carriers are allocated to RF port #2.

SCANNER GUIDE 489

Spectrum scanning is counted as one of the systems. Spectrum scanning always

has the highest priority and it is set to be measured via RF port #1. The resource slot

number defines in how many processes one RF port is divided.


STARTING DEVICES

Starting Nemo Outdoor:

1. Start Nemo Outdoor from the Start menu, Nemo Tools submenu.

2. Do not load any previous device configuration if asked.

Starting Nemo FSR1 Scanner

1. From the Measurement menu, select Add New Device.

2. Click on Scanner.

3. From the list select Nemo FSR1 and click Next.

4. In the Scanner Properties dialog, select Nemo Scanner LAN as the Port and

click OK.

SCANNER GUIDE 491

5. If the dialog did not close, the start up did not succeed. Check the cable

connections and the settings and try again.

6. If the Device Info window is not visible, open it from the View menu. A green light

should be blinking. This means that the device is working properly and scanning

using the default settings. If the status field displays, Device is not started, check

that you are in online mode (click the Work Offline/Online button ). If the

device is started but not scanning, check that you have selected channels to be

scanned.

Starting Anritsu Scanners



3. From the list select:

For Anritsu ML8720B: Anritsu ML8720B UMTS 2100 and click Next.

For Anritsu ML8720C without the GSM option: Anritsu ML8720C UMTS

2100 and click Next.

For Anritsu ML8720C with the GSM option: Anritsu ML8720C GSM/UMTS

and click Next.

For Anritsu ML8740A and Anritsu ML8740B without the GSM option: Anritsu

ML8740A/ ML8740B UMTS 2100 and click Next.

For Anritsu ML8740A and Anritsu ML8740B with the GSM option: Anritsu

ML8740A/ML8740B GSM/UMTS and click Next.

For Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H Analyzer: Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H, and click

Next.

For Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum Analyzer: Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum

Analyzer, and click Next.


4. In the Scanner Properties dialog, set the COM Port to the port the scanner is

connected to (ML8720B/ML8720C)/select the USB port (e.g., Anritsu USB1)/or

select the Anritsu LAN 1-4 with Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H depending on which IP

address was selected for the scanner.

The next step is not valid for the Anritsu ML8740A, Anritsu ML8740B, Anritsu

MS2721B DVB-H, or Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum Analyzer scanner.

5. Set the baud rate to the one used by the scanner and click OK. Note that the

baud rate must be the same that you chose when you were connecting the

scanner. The dialog will be closed and the scanner should now be connected to

the system.

6. If the dialog did not close, the start up did not succeed. Check the cable

connections and the settings and try again.

7. If the Device Info window is not visible, open it from the View menu. A green light

should be blinking. This means that the device is working properly and scanning

using the default settings. If the status field displays, Device is not started, check

that you are in online mode (click the Work Offline/Online button ).

APPENDIX 9 493

Starting DRT Scanners




DRT WIMAX 2300, if you want to make measurements with the 2300 MHz (WiMAX)

band.

DRT WIMAX 2500, if you want to make measurements with the 2500MHz (WiMAX)

band.

DRT WIMAX 3500, if you want to make measurements with the 3500MHz (WiMAX)

band.

4. In the Scanner Properties dialog, set the COM Port to DRT LAN.


Note that the no changes need to be made to the Baud rate, Antenna gain, and Cable loss

fields. See the next chapter for further instructions on how to make measurements.

Starting PCTEL Scanners

Starting the GPS:

With the PCTEL LX WCDMA scanner you can use either the GSP receiver integrated into the scanner

or an external GPS. See page 496 for instructions on how to enable the integrated GPS receiver.

Note that you cannot use both the integrated and an external GPS receiver at the same time.

Note that with the PCTEL LX GSM/WCDMA scanner the Internal GPS receiver should be

activated only in UMTS mode.

To be able to make Top-N preamble scanning the scanner receiver must acquire a GPS fix at

least 30 seconds before starting the Nemo Outdoor application in online mode. If the existing

configuration file includes a PCTEL WiMAX scanner, it is advised to open the configuration file

in offline mode. If scanner does not send any results after 30 seconds, it is advised to send a

reset command to the scanner via the user interface.


2. Click on GPS.

3. From the list, select the GPS model that you have connected to the PC and click Next.

4. The GPS Properties dialog is opened. Set the parameters (see the GPS User Manual for

instructions). They should be correct by default. Click OK. The view will return to the Nemo

Outdoor main window.

5. From the View menu activate Device Info. A check mark will appear next to the command when it

is activated.

6. In the Device Info window a green light should be blinking. This means that the GPS is working

properly.

APPENDIX 9 495

Starting the PCTEL LX/EX/PCT GSM/WCDMA/1xEV-DO/LTE Scanner:




For PCTEL LX UMTS 1700/2100 scanner: PCTEL LX UMTS 1700/2100, and click Next.

For PCTEL LX UMTS 1900 scanner: PCTEL LX UMTS 1900, and click Next.

For PCTEL LX UMTS 2100 scanner: PCTEL LX UMTS 2100, and click Next.

For PCTEL LX UMTS 850/1900 scanner: PCTEL LX UMTS 850/1900, and click Next..

For PCTEL LX UMTS 850 scanner: PCTEL LX UMTS 850, and click Next..

For PCTEL LX CDMA/EV-DO 850 scanner, select PCTEL LX EVDO 800, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX WCDMA 2100 AWS&GSM 850/ 1900 scanner: PCTEL EX GSM 850/1900

UMTS AWS, and click Next.

For PCTEL LX 1xEV-DO 450 scanner: PCTEL LX EVDO 450, and click Next.

For PCTEL LX 1xEV-DO 850 scanner: PCTEL LX EVDO 800, and click Next.

For PCTEL LX 1xEV-DO 1900: PCTEL LX EDVO 1900, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX CDMA/EV-DO 850/1900 scanner, select CDMA2000 850/1900 EVDO

850/1900, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX GSM 850/1900 & WCDMA 850/1900 scanner: PCTEL EX GSM 850/1900

UMTS 850/1900, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX GSM 900/1800 & WCDMA 900/2100 scanner: PCTEL EX GSM 900/1800

UMTS 900/2100, and click Next.

For PCTEL PCTEL EX GSM 1900 & WCDMA 2100 AWS scanner: PCTEL EX GSM 1900

UMTS AWS, and click Next..

For PCTEL EX WIMAX scanner: PCTEL EX WIMAX, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX 900/1800 WCDMA/TD-SCDMA 2000, select PCTEL EX 900/1800 UMTS

TDSCDMA 2000, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX LTE 1800/2600 scanner, select PCTEL EX LTE 1800/2600, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX LTE 2100 scanner, select PCTEL EX LTE 2100, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX LTE 2100/2600 scanner, select PCTEL EX LTE 2100/2600, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX LTE 700ABC scanner, select PCTEL EX LTE 700ABC, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX LTE 700C scanner, select PCTEL EX LTE 700C, and click Next.

For PCTEL EX LTE AWS/700BC scanner, select PCTEL EX LTE AWS/700BC, and click

Next.

For PCTEL EX LTE AWS/700C scanner, select PCTEL EX LTE AWS/700C, and click Next.

PCTEL EX mini series scanners:

o For WCDMA 2100, select PCTEL EX UMTS 2100, and click Next...

o For WCDMA 850/1900, select PCTEL EX UMTS 850/1900, and click Next...


o For WCDMA 900/2100, select PCTEL EX UMTS 900/2100, and click Next...

o For WCDMA AWS, select PCTEL EX UMTS AWS, and click Next...

For PCTEL MX scanners, select PCTEL MX and click Next.

For PCTEL PCT GSM 900/1800 scanner, select PCTEL PCT GSM 900/1800, and click Next.

For PCTEL PCT UMTS 2100 scanner, select PCTEL PCT UMTS 2100, and click Next.

4. In the Scanner Properties dialog, set the COM Port to the port the scanner is connected to. With

MX scanners, select the PCTEL USB item.

5. Set the baud rate to the one used by the scanner and click OK. The dialog will be closed and the

scanner should now be connected to the system.

6. If the dialog did not close, the start-up did not succeed. Check the cable connections and the

settings and try again.


is activated.

8. A green light on the PCTEL scanner in the Device Info window should be blinking. This means that

the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. See chapter Starting

Measurement (page 501) for instructions on making your own scanner configuration.

Enabling integrated GPS receiver for PCTEL LX WCDMA/PCTEL EX WiMAX scanner

1. After the PCTEL LX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the Measurement

Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties.

2. In the Measurement Properties dialog click the Advanced button.

APPENDIX 9 497

3. In the Advanced Properties dialog, select Yes for the Enable Integrated GPS Receiver option

and click OK.

4. The integrated GPS receiver is now enabled.


Note that with the PCTEL LX GSM /WCDMA scanner the Internal GPS receiver should be

activated only with UMTS mode.

To be able to make Top-N preamble scanning the scanner receiver must acquire a GPS fix at

least 30 seconds before starting the Nemo Outdoor application in online mode. If the existing

configuration file includes a PCTEL WiMAX scanner, it is advised to open the configuration file

in offline mode. If scanner does not send any results after 30 seconds, it is advised to send a

reset command to the scanner via the user interface.


Starting the PCTEL LX GSM/WCDMA dual-mode scanner

1. From the Measurement menu, select Add New Device. Click on Scanner.

2. From the list select PCTEL LX GSM 900/1800 and click Next.

3. In the Scanner Properties dialog, Port field you should see two consecutive COM ports (e.g.,

COM 3 and COM 4). Select the COM port with the smaller number and click OK.

4. From the Measurement menu, select Add New Device. Click on Scanner.

5. From the list select PCTEL LX UMTS 2100 and click Next.

6. In the Scanner Properties dialog, Port field you should see two consecutive COM ports (e.g.,

COM 3 and COM 4). Select the COM port with the bigger number and click OK.


is activated.

APPENDIX 9 499

8. A green light should be blinking in the Device Info for both devices. This means that the devices

are working properly and scanning using the default settings. If the status field displays, Device is

not started, check that you are in online mode (click the Work Offline/Online button ).

9. The GSM and UMTS scanners will appear as separate devices and must be configured

individually.

Enabling integrated GPS receiver for PCTEL LX GSM/WCDMA dual-mode scanner

Note that with the PCTEL dual-mode scanner the integrated GPS receiver needs to be enabled

only for one scanner.

1. After the PCTEL LX scanners are connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the

Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties.

2. In the Measurement Properties dialog click the Advanced button.

3. In the Advanced Properties dialog, select Yes in the Enable Integrated GPS Receiver option and

click OK.

4. The integrated GPS receiver is now enabled.


Note that with the PCTEL LX GSM /WCDMA scanner the Internal GPS receiver should be

activated only with UMTS mode.


Starting Rohde & Schwarz Scanners

1. Start Nemo Outdoor. From the Measurement menu, select Add New Device.


3. From the list select the applicable R&S scanner, and click Next..

4. In the Scanner Properties dialog, select R&S IEEE1394A in the Port drop-down menu.

APPENDIX 9 501

STARTING MEASUREMENT

Nemo FSR1 Scanner

GSM+UMTS Scanning

1. Open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General

Properties.

2. In the Measurement Properties dialog you can select the channels to be scanned:

3. On the Frequency scanning, GSM page, click the Select Channels button to select the GSM

channels to be scanned.

Channel style defines the style of the measured channel. For GSM the option is 200 kHz.



RX Level Average: the data reported is the average RX level, in dB, of the number of samples.


reports the result.


written to file.


Select the BCCH C/I option to activate C/I measurements for the BCCH channel.


4. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file.

TOP-N Pilot Scanning - UMTS

Unknown Pilot scanning can be used for scanning unknown pilots or the strongest pilots. The

Unknown Pilot Scan will from now on be referred to as TOP-N Pilot Mode/Scanning.

To set pilot scanning settings:


Properties.

2. In the Measurement Properties dialog, go to the Pilot scanning page.

Note that some of the options are enabled/disabled in this dialog according to the selected

scanner model.



Channel style refers to the style of the channel. For UMTS scanners, the options are Narrow Band

(200kHz) and Wide Band (3.84MHz).





reports the result.

APPENDIX 9 503







scanner in Top-N mode. The maximum number is 32.



been purchased with the scanner. Cell information decoding is supported only in WCDMA.






The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog where you can select

channels for pilot scanning.


To select channels:

1. In the Measurement Properties, Pilot scanning, UMTS page, click the Top-N Configuration

button. The Select Channels dialog is opened.

2. The table displays the channel numbers, not the frequencies. If you know the frequency but not

the channel number, the channel number can be calculated by multiplying the frequency in MHz

by five. The channel spacing is always 200 kHz.

3. You can remove channels from the Selected list by selecting a channel and clicking the Remove

button.

4. You can add channels to the Selected list by selecting a channel from the Available list and

clicking the Add button.

5. Click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog.

6. After making the appropriate settings, click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the

scanning.

7. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. This means that the device

is working properly and scanning using the default settings. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few

seconds.


APPENDIX 9 505

Anritsu Scanners

GSM+UMTS Scanning


Properties.

2. In the Measurement Properties dialog you can select the channels to be scanned:

If the scanner supports only one carrier, you can select either GSM or UMTS channels to be

scanned.

If the scanner supports two carriers, you can select for scanning both GSM and UMTS

channels. If you select GSM channels, you can select a maximum of one UMTS channel. If you

do not select GSM channels, you can select one or two UMTS channels.

3. On the Frequency scanning, GSM page, click the Select Channels button to select the GSM

channels to be scanned.

Note that the scanner reports the 32 strongest channels from the selected GSM channels.

Channel style defines the style of the measured channel. For GSM the options are 200 kHz and 30

kHz narrow.




RX Level Average: the data reported is the average RX level, in dB, of the number of samples.

RX Level Maximum: the data reported is the maximum RX level, in dB, of the number of

samples.

RX Level Minimum: the data reported is the minimum RX level, in dB, of the number of

samples.

RX Level Standard Deviation: the data reported is the standard of deviation of the number of

samples reported as an integer.

RX Level 10%: the data reported is the 10th percentile RX level, in dB, of the number of

samples.

RX Level 50%: the data reported is the 50th percentile RX level, in dB, of the number of

samples.

RX Level 90%: the data reported is the 90th percentile RX level, in dB, of the Number of

samples.


reports the result.


written to file.


BSIC Threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports.

BCCH C/I option is available with PCTEL and Rohde&Schwarz GSM scanners only.


APPENDIX 9 507

TOP-N Pilot Scanning - UMTS


Unknown Pilot Scan will from now on be referred to as TOP-N Pilot Mode/Scanning.

To set pilot scanning settings:


Properties.


Note that some of the options are enabled/disabled in this dialog according to the selected

scanner model.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. For UMTS scanners, the options are Narrow Band

(200kHz) and Wide Band (3.84MHz). For Anritsu scanners, only Wide Band is available.





reports the result.

Number of fingers defines the maximum number of fingers used for RAKE in measurement.


Selective level determines a valid path. Set a value (in dB) to decide a valid path from the noise floor

(average value).

Rake threshold determines a valid path (in dB). Subtracting the set value from a path with a







Finger option enables and disables Finger measurements for the scanner.



scrambling code.


The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog where you can select

channels for pilot scanning. If you press the arrow, a drop-down menu will appear from where you can

select Top-N Search Configuration.

Please note that the Top-N Search Configuration dialog is available for Anritsu UMTS scanners

only.

In the Top-N Search Configuration dialog you can limit the search performed by the scanner and

consequently speed up the search.

Group specifies the group number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 63.

APPENDIX 9 509

Cell specifies the cell number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 7.

Secondary code specifies the secondary scrambling code. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0.

Channelization code specifies the channelization code. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0.

Search method defines how the search is performed. P-CPICH (primary common pilot channel)

searches with P-CPICH. SCH performs a three-step search with P-SCH and S-SCH.

To select pilot parameters:

1. Select the TOP-N Mode option.

2. Set the Number of Scrambling codes value. This defines how many strongest pilots are to be

reported by the scanner. The maximum is 32 pilots.

To select channels:



10. The table displays the channel numbers, not the frequencies. If you know the frequency but not



With the Anritsu ML8720B single carrier scanner only one channel can be selected. If you are

measuring with the Anritsu ML8720B-03 dual carrier scanner, two channels can be selected.


11. You can remove channels from the Selected list by selecting a channel and clicking the Remove

button.

12. You can add channels to the Selected list by selecting a channel from the Available list and

clicking the Add button.


To select search parameters:

1. Open the Measurement Properties, Pilot scanning, UMTS page. Press down the Top-N

Configuration button and select Top-N Search Configuration.

APPENDIX 9 511

2. The Top-N Search Configuration dialog opens.

3. Set the Group search range. The group number is the scrambling code divided by 8. For example,

SC (scrambling code) 12 = group 1, cell 4.

4. Set the Cell search range. The cell number is the division modulus. For example, SC (scrambling

code) 12 = group 1, cell 4.

5. The Secondary Code and the Channelization Code ranges should be set from 0 to 0 for

scanning only the P-CPICH.

6. Select the Search Method. SCH means that the P-CPICH are searched using P-SCH and S-SCH.

P-CPICH means that the P-CPICH are searched without using P-SCH and S-SCH.

Note that the P-CPICH method is much slower than the SCH method.

7. Click OK to accept the settings and to return to the Measurement Properties dialog.

8. Data processing method defines how the scanner will process samples before reporting.

9. PN threshold defines the limit above which Ec/N0 peaks must go if Aggregated data processing

method is used.

In pilot scanning mode, the RSSI is always measured for each channel.

In pilot scanning mode the P-CPICH Ec/N0 and RSCP are always measured for each scrambling

code.


scanning.



seconds.



Pilot Scrambling Code Scanning - Anritsu Scanners

Pilot Scrambling Code Scanning or Known Scrambling Code Scanning can be used to scan known

pilots. The Known Scrambling Code Scanning will from now on be referred to as Normal Pilot Mode.


Properties.

2. Go to the Measurement Properties, Pilot scanning, UMTS page .

3. Clear the TOP-N mode option and click the Select Channels button. The Select Scrambling

Codes dialog is opened.

4. Select channels in the Selected channel numbers table by clicking the Select button.

With the Anritsu ML8720B single carrier scanner only one channel can be selected. If you are

measuring with the Anritsu ML8720B-03 dual carrier scanner, two channels can be selected.

5. For each selected channel, select scrambling codes. Select a channel and click the Select button

below the Selected scrambling codes table.


7. When using an Anritsu scanner in Pilot Scanning mode, you can define the measurement period. It

defines the time period from which results are gathered and processed before reporting.


In Pilot Scanning Mode the RSSI is always measured for each channel.

APPENDIX 9 513

In Pilot Scanning Mode the P-CPICH Ec/N0 and RSCP are always measured for each scrambling

code.


scanning.



seconds.


DVB-H Scanning

DVB-H scanning can be performed with the Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H Analyzer scanner.


Properties.

2. In the Measurement Properties, Pilot scanning, DVB-H page, select a frequency to be

measured. Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H Analyzer scans frequencies between (DVB-H) 474 - 850 MHz.



scanning.


is working properly and scanning using the default settings.


Spectrum Analyzer Measurements

DVB-H scanning can be performed with the Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum Analyzer scanner.


Properties.

2. In the Measurement Properties dialog, go to the Spectrum scanning page.

APPENDIX 9 515

3. Select the Enable spectrum scanning option and click on Add.

4. Define the start and stop frequencies within which the measurement will be performed. If you

manually define the start and stop frequencies, you can either select to add the frequencies to the

scanning list or save them as a predefined set. Select your option in the Add to scanning list

menu.

5. Select Set center frequency and bandwidth to define the center frequency and the bandwidth to

be measured. If you manually define the center frequency and bandwidth, you can either select to

add them to the scanning list, or save them as a predefined set. Select your option in the Add to

scanning list menu.

With Anritsu MS2721B spectrum analyzer the supported frequency range is from 9 kHz to

7.1GHz. The sample count is fixed to 551, and RBW is adjusted automatically. RBW is between

1 Hz - 3 MHz. It is automatically adjusted to the closest value of 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30Hz, 100 Hz

... 300 kHz, 1 MHz, 3 MHz.

6. When signal volume is lower than -50dBm, selecting the Use preamplifier functionality in the

Measurement Properties dialog can increase the scanner’s measuring sensitivity, hence slightly

decreasing background noise. However, it is recommended that it is not selected when signal

volume is higher than -50dBm.

7. You can add scanning sets in the Predefined scanning sets field through the Add to Scanning

List button. Click the arrow in the button and select Save as Predefined Set. Define a name in the

Enter Frequency Set Name field and click OK.


8. The name appears in the Predefined scanning sets field along with the chosen frequency and/or

bandwidth information selected in the Reporting field.


scanning.




APPENDIX 9 517

PCTEL Scanners

Frequency Scanning – PCTEL GSM/UMTS Scanners

Frequency scanning can be used to scan band power. It is also useful for checking that the band is

deselected and for finding out the center frequency.

1. After the scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the Measurement


2. In the Measurement Properties dialog, go to the Frequency scanning, UMTS page.

3. In the Channel style field, select the channel width. The options are narrow band (200 kHz) and

wide band (3.84 MHz).

To find out the center frequency used, set the Channel Style to 200 kHz and select all the

channels in the frequency region where the carrier should exist; for example, all channels

allocated to an operator. The center frequency will stand out in Frequency Scanning mode. The

received signal should be above the noise level in order to find out the center frequency.


4. Click the Select Channels button to open the Select Channels dialog.

5. The table displays the channel numbers, not the frequencies. If you know the frequency but not the

channel number, the channel number can be calculated by multiplying the frequency in MHz by

five. The channel spacing is always 200 kHz.

6. Remove channels from the Selected list by selecting a channel and clicking the Remove button.

7. Add channels to the Selected list by selecting a channel from the Available list and clicking the

Add button.


9. Click OK and OK to close the Measurement Properties dialog and to re-start the scanner with the

new settings.




APPENDIX 9 519

Frequency Scanning – PCTEL EX LTE Scanner


Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. By clicking the

Advanced button on the General page, you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. Here

you can enable and disable the integrated GPS receiver. This means you will not need an external

GPS receiver in order to collect position data.

2. On the Frequency scanning page, define the Channel style.


3. By clicking the Select Channels button, you can access the Select Channels dialog.

4. Select one band from the list or all of them. You can also select one band at a time and add the

bands you want to scan. If all bands are selected, you have the possibility to select Remove All | ...

items from every band. Alternatively, if only one band is selected you can remove only items from

the current band through Remove All | ...items from current band.

The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to

the Selected list, click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply

double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning,

click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers

in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add.

To remove channels from the Selected list, click on the channel you want to remove and then click

the Remove button or double-click the channel. To remove all channels, click the Remove All

button. You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the SHIFT key and

clicking on the channels you want to add or remove.


scanning.




Frequency Scanning – PCT GSM Scanner



2. By clicking the Advanced button, you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. Here you can

enable and disable the integrated GPS receiver. This means you will not need an external GPS

receiver in order to collect position data.

APPENDIX 9 521

3. Go to the Frequency scanning page.





available with PCTEL GSM scanners only.
















Note that Sample size and Data mode are not enabled with PCT GSM frequency scanning

APPENDIX 9 523


scanning.




Frequency Scanning – PCTEL EVDO Scanners






3. Go to the Frequency scanning page.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. For EV-DO scanners, the options are 1250 kHz

Normal and 30 kHz Normal.


written to file.

















scanning.




APPENDIX 9 525

TOP-N Pilot Scanning PCTEL - UMTS


Unknown Pilot Scan will from now on be referred to as TOP-N Pilot Mode.



2. Go to the Pilot scanning page.






















scrambling code.


To select channels:



The table displays the channel numbers, not the frequencies. If you know the frequency but not





Add button.

With a PCTEL LX scanner a maximum of 8 channels can be selected in the pilot mode.

With a PCTEL EX scanner a maximum of 15 channels can be selected in the pilot mode.

With a PCTEL MX scanner 1 channel can be selected in the pilot mode.

With a PCTEL LTE EX scanner a maximum of 15 channels can be selected in the pilot mode.

With a PCTEL PCT scanner a maximum of 4 channels can be selected in the pilot mode.


To select pilot parameters:

1. Select the TOP-N Mode option.

2. Set the Number of scrambling codes value. This defines how many strongest pilots are to be

reported by the scanner. The maximum is 32 pilots.

Note that with the PCTEL PCT Scanner the maximum number of pilots to be selected for

scanning is 8.

Note that the PCTEL EX WCDMA scanner only supports the TOP-N mode. You can select up to

32 pilots for scanning.

APPENDIX 9 527

3. To improve on the accuracy of radio propagation models, High speed mode makes it possible to

acquire more samples (max 32 pilots per channel), while High dynamic mode offers fewer

samples (max 16 pilots per channel) with a larger dynamic range.

To set general parameters:



method is used.

To select measured values:



code.

1. In the Measurement Properties, Pilot scanning page:

Select the P-SCH option to enable P-SCH Ec/N0 and RSCP measurement.

Select the S-SCH option to enable S-SCH Ec/N0 and RSCP measurement.

Select the Time of arrival option to enable time of arrival measurement.

Select the Delay spread option to enable P-CPICH delay spread measurement.

Select the SIR option to enable P-CPICH SIR measurement.

Select the Delay profile option to enable P-CPICH Delay Profile measurement. In TOP-N pilot

scanning mode the scrambling code for delay profile measurement cannot be selected.


scanning.




TOP-N Pilot Scanning - PCTEL EX/LX, EVDO


Unknown Pilot Scan will from now on be referred to as TOP-N Pilot Mode.

1. After the PCTEL LX/EX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the






3. In the Measurement Properties dialog, go to Pilot scanning page.

















APPENDIX 9 529





scanning.




Spectrum Scanning - PCTEL EX

Spectrum scanning is enabled on PCTEL EX scanners only in online mode. Hence, the device needs

to be added to Nemo Outdoor in online mode to activate the Spectrum scanning functionality

1. After the PCTEL EX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the Measurement




3. Select the Enable spectrum scanning option, and click Add.

4. To create new scanning sets, define the scanning frequencies in the Reporting view.

Set start and stop frequencies defines the frequency range that will be scanned.

Set center frequency and bandwidth defines the frequency range that will be scanned.

The Sample count field determines the sample count measured for the given frequency range.

5. The Add to Scanning List menu enables you to decide whether the new scanning set is added to

the scanning list, or saved as a predefined set also for later use.

6. The Predefined scanning sets can be used to quickly select the frequency range to be scanned.

Select a set from the list, and click on Add to Scanning List.

With PCTEL EX scanning receivers, the internal frequency range is defined with start frequency,

resolution bandwidth (RBW) and number of points. Stop frequency = start frequency + (frequency

spacing) * (number of points – 1). All the points need to be within the frequency range of the requested

RF Band. Frequency spacing is between the center frequencies and spacing between points is half of

the resolution bandwidth. The maximum number of samples (points) is 2560. As seen in the formula

above, stop frequency is calculated based on start frequency and number of points. Stop frequency

set by the user is only requested value but it is not necessarily used during the measurement.

APPENDIX 9 531

If the requested frequency range is not supported by the device, Nemo Outdoor automatically adjusts

the frequency range for the device, and only frequency ranges supported by the scanning receiver are

used to make spectrum analyzer measurements. The number of samples is used only for the

frequency range supported by the scanning receiver. Nemo Outdoor does not read the supported

frequency range from the scanning receiver. For example, in the picture below the user has set start

and stop frequencies as seen within the red area. However, the scanning receiver supports only

frequency ranges shown by the green areas. The number of samples is used only for green areas and

the correct RBW is selected accordingly.

7. Click OK to return to the Spectrum scanning page.


8. The added frequency ranges will be added to the Scanning list.

9. To remove items from the scanning list, select one or more, and select Remove All | Remove

Selected Items. Alternatively, click on Remove All to remove every item from the list.


scanning.




LTE OFDM Scanning – PCTEL EX LTE

OFDM scanning can be used for scanning Reference signal / Sync signals with a PCTEL LTE

scanner and Nemo Outdoor.

1. After the PCTEL LTE scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the





APPENDIX 9 533



Cyclic prefix defines the type of signal the scanner is set to measure. With Autodetect selected, the

scanner will automatically detect the appropriate signal type.









RSSI threshold determines a valid path (in dB). Subtracting the set value from a path with a



from N best cells. Number of cells field indicates the number of best cells you want the scanning to

notify you of. Up to 16 sectors are reported with specific cell ID.










The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels where you can select channels for

pilot scanning. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific.

4. When you select LTE channels, you can also define some channel-specific settings. In the LTE

Channel Specific Settings dialog, select the channel from the Selected channels list and define

the settings.









One s lot, Tslo t=15360 Ts

GPUpPTS

D wPTS



30720 Ts


GPUpPTS

D wPTS


APPENDIX 9 535







scanning.





Pilot Scrambling Code Scanning - PCTEL LX

Known Scrambling Code Scanning can be used to scan known pilots. The Known Scrambling Code

Scanning will from now on be referred to as Normal Pilot Mode.

1. After the PCTEL LX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the Measurement



3. Clear the TOP-N mode option and click the Select Channels button. The Select Scrambling

Codes dialog is opened.

4. Select channels in the Selected channel numbers table by clicking the Select button.

With a PCTEL scanner a maximum of 8 channels can be selected in the pilot mode.

5. For each selected channel, select scrambling codes. Select a channel and click the Select button

below the Selected scrambling codes table.




method is used.


APPENDIX 9 537


code.


scanning.



seconds.


DRT Scanners

Frequency Scanning

Frequency scanning can be used to scan band power. It is also useful for checking that the band is

deselected and for finding out the center frequency.

1. After the DRT WIMAX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the


2. You can enable or disable the integrated GPS receiver through the Advanced button. It is also

possible to use an external GPS device with the scanner.

3. In the Measurement Properties dialog, go to the Frequency scanning page.


4. In the Channel Style list box, select the channel width. The options are Wide Band (5000 kHz) and

Wide Band 2 (10000 kHz).

5. Click the Select Frequencies button to open the Select Frequencies dialog.

6. The table displays the available frequencies. Select and add them in the Selected view by clicking

on Add>>.

7. Remove frequencies from the Selected list by selecting a frequency and clicking the Remove

button.

8. Add frequencies in the Selected list by selecting a frequency from the Available list and clicking

the Add button.



scanning.



seconds.


APPENDIX 9 539

Pilot Scanning

1. After the DRT WIMAX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the







results from N best preambles. Number of preambles field defines how many preambles are reported

by the scanner in TOP-N mode.

CINR refers to the Carrier to Interference and Noise ratio value, in dB *100 (e.g., -16.34). It is based

on the requested reuse factor.

Preamble delay refers to the number of samples between expected arrival time and actual arrival

time of preamble with respect to GPS time reference. The values range from 0 to 1023+32. Each

sample corresponds to 89.285 nanoseconds.


Reuse factor refers to a system design parameter that can be manipulated to achieve the desired

balance between the interference and the network coverage. The WiMAX air interface modulating

waveform has been divided into three segments (Segment 0, 1 and 2). The allocation of frequency

sub-carrier into these three segments is done in such a way that e.g. a downlink signal on segment 0

will not interfere with the downlink signal on segment 1. In a Reuse Factor 1 measurement,

contributions from all the three segments are considered in the measured parameters, so that the

CINRs are calculated from all the three segments. When Reuse Factor 3 is selected, only the

contribution of the desired segment is considered, and the CINRs are calculated only from the same

segment. As a broad guideline, measurements performed with Reuse Factor 1 will provide the signal

quality of the all the detected preambles relative to each other, whereas the Reuse Factor 3 category

of measurements will provide the signal quality of preambles within the same segment.




3. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog where you can select

frequencies for scanning. The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is device

specific.

APPENDIX 9 541


scanning.



seconds.


Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ/TSML/TSMW Scanner

With Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ, TSML and TSMW scanners you can perform GSM frequency

scanning, GSM/UMTS scanning, CDMA TOP-N Pilot scanning, EVDO TOP-N Pilot scanning, UMTS

TOP-N Pilot scanning, and Spectrum scanning. In addition, it is possible to perform CW scanning

measurements with the TSMQ and TSML scanners and LTE measurements with the TSMW scanner.

It is possible to perform any of the measurements introduced below separately, any combination of the

measurements or all of them simultaneously.

Frequency Scanning - Rohde & Schwarz Scanner, GSM

1. After the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ/TSML scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor,

open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General

Properties.





available with the PCTEL GSM scanner only.



been purchased with the scanner.


2. Click the Select Channels button to open the Select Channels dialog.

3. The table displays the channel numbers, not the frequencies. If you know the frequency but not the

channel number, the channel number can be calculated by multiplying the frequency in MHz by

five. The channel spacing is always 200 kHz.

4. Select one band from the Band list or all of them. You can also select one band at a time and add

the bands you want to scan. If all bands are selected, you have the possibility to select Remove

All | ... items from every band. Alternatively, if only one band is selected you can remove only

items from the current band through Remove All |...items from current band.


APPENDIX 9 543


Add button.



scanning.



seconds.


TOP-N Pilot Scanning - Rohde & Schwarz Scanners, UMTS


Properties.

2. Go to the Pilot scanning, UMTS page to define UMTS-specific Pilot scanning settings.















Note that the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ, TSML-W, TSML-GW and TSMW scanners support only

TOP-N mode and High speed and High dynamic pilot measurement modes. In addition, Data

processing method and CPICH Ec/N0 threshold are supported general settings, and P-SCH, S-

SCH, Time of arrival, Delay spread and SIR are supported of the scanning options.






When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected, the missing neighbor information event

(NMISS) is written in the log file. You can view the missing neighbor information, for example, in a grid

view.

When the Neighbor list decoding option is selected, the NLIST (neighbor list) event is written in the

log file for both GSM and WCDMA.





scrambling code.



The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (p.80) where you can select


Note that with UMTS the maximum number of channels that can be scanned is 32 channels, and

the maximum number of pilots per each channel is 32.


scanning.

APPENDIX 9 545



seconds.


TOP-N Pilot Scanning - Rohde & Schwarz Scanner, CDMA/EVDO

Note that the EVDO measurements can only be performed in a proper way when a CDMA 2000

channel is measured as well. In this way, the time relationship between the different PN offsets

is resolved.

1. After the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the


2. In the Measurement Properties dialog, go to the Pilot Scanning, CDMA page.



TOP-N mode option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. Number of pilots field

defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode.





Note that the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ scanner supports max 32 channels.


scanning.



seconds.


TOP-N Pilot Scanning - Rohde & Schwarz TSMW, LTE


Properties.

2. Go to the Pilot scanning, LTE page to define LTE-specific pilot scanning settings.





APPENDIX 9 547





When you select LTE channels, you can also define some channel-specific settings. In the LTE

Channel Specific Settings dialog, select the channel from the Selected channels list and define the

settings.









One slot, Tslot=15360 Ts

GPUpPTS

DwPTS



30720Ts


GP UpPTS

D wPTS









scanning.



seconds.


Spectrum Scanning - Rohde & Schwarz Scanners

1. After the Rohde & Schwarz scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor, open the


APPENDIX 9 549



3. In the Measurement Properties dialog, select the Enable spectrum scanning option. Click Add.

4. To create new scanning sets, define the scanning frequencies in the Reporting view.

Set start and stop frequencies defines the frequency range that will be scanned.

Set center frequency and bandwidth defines the frequency range that will be scanned.

The Sample count field determines the sample count measured for the given frequency range.

With Rohde & Schwarz scanner receivers, the user can set the start and stop frequency between

80MHz and 3000MHz. Sample counts are divided to the frequency range defined by the user. The

TSMx device has a native frequency resolution of 12.8 KHz. It should be noted that the frequency shift

cannot be lower than 12.8kHz, which sets the number of sample count max. limit to 5000 samples. In

case the selected frequency range and sample count require a frequency shift lower than 12.8kHz, the

sample count is automatically decreased. The sweep speed, resolution bandwidth and sampling rate

are fixed. The sweep speed is 1 GHz / 0.1 sec, the resolution bandwidth is fixed at 30 kHz.

For example, if the start frequency is 80 MHz, and the stop frequency is 100 MHz, the total measured

bandwidth is 20 MHz. If the sample count is set to 20, power (RMS) is measured from a 1 MHz

bandwidth. With the frequency shift of 12.8 KHz ~ 78 samples are taken from each 1 MHz bandwidth.

The Add to scanning list menu enables you to decide whether the newly created scanning set is

added to the scanning list, or saved as a predefined set also for later use.

APPENDIX 9 551

The Predefined scanning sets can be used to quickly select the frequency range to be scanned.

Select a set from the list, and click on Add to scanning list.

5. Click OK to access the Scanning list view.

6. The added frequency ranges will be added to the Scanning list.

7. To remove items from the scanning list, select one or more, and select Remove all | Remove

selected items. Alternatively, click on Remove all to remove every item from the list.


scanning.



seconds.


TROUBLESHOOTING

If a Scanner synchronization failed error message appears in the Output window, the scanner is

working properly, but the scanner did not find strong enough a CPICH in a short time period.

Nevertheless, the measurement will go on normally.

If a Scanner GPS locking failed error message appears in the Output window, the scanner is

working properly, but the scanner GPS has no fix or is not connected. The measurement will go on

normally, but the scanner accuracy is not as good as it is when the scanner GPS has a fix.


APPENDIX 9 - TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES

PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA

UAC Settings

If UAC (User Account Control) is set to always notify, it might cause issues with data testing. A PS

connection can be established but data transfers cannot be made. It is recommended that the UAC

settings are changed to “Never notify”. This can be done via User Account Control Settings. If UAC

settings cannot be changed, it is highly recommended that Nemo Outdoor is started with

administration rights by right-clicking the Nemo Outdoor icon and by selecting “Run as administrator”.

Antivirus Filtering

Disable the antivirus application and Windows firewall. If the data transfer still does not work properly,

please do the following:

1. Activate PS connection (activate PDP context).

2. Go to Network Settings and choose the appropriate connection assigned for the device.

APPENDIX 9 553

3. Go to Connection Properties and check that antivirus NDIS filtering is unchecked.

Low Data Throughputs

In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications,

read this document for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols.

In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications,

the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters.

For example, low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad

coverage or high interference. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio)

points to capacity, server or transmission problems.

In LTE networks, observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR).

PRB affects throughput directly. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell, a

bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the

available bandwidth).

Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are

other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that

prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput.

High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage.

When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation, average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be

higher than 0, typically 10-20%, in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme

Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. Higher values indicate that the radio

link is about to drop. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values.

Other things that could help troubleshooting:

Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. Some HSPA USB

interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry.

Try another FTP server for comparison.

Command prompt FTP throughput. This comparison is recommended because command prompt

FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. For better results, keep

Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. Also

try different servers.

The linked image cannot be displayed. The file may have been moved, renamed, or deleted. Verify that the link points to the correct file and location.


For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if

the throughput increases. Does not work manually, script is always needed.

For Nemo Outdoor 5.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test

simultaneous transfers. Works also manually.

Make a comparison test between Nemo Outdoor and the connection manager used with the

device. When configuring a device with Nemo Outdoor, only the trace port should be defined. The

modem port and dial-up connection must be left blank. As ports are left blank it is not possible to

perform a manual PDP context activation or data transfer via Nemo Outdoor. However, a script file

with data connection commands can be used. Script files should include only data transfer

commands, not Attach/detach or PDP context activation or deactivation commands. Start a data

transfer and observe the application data throughput value. Make the same test again but this time

make a connection using Nemo Outdoor.

All Windows Versions

How to check the TCP window size from packet logs:

Using Wireshark:

1. Check the .pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer.

Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.

Using Nemo Outdoor:

1. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.

2. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0:

3. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Look at the Tcp tree. Window shows the current

value.

APPENDIX 9 555

Using debug logs (for developers, help desk, etc.):

1. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.

TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry.

TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Set to default.

TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP window.

A measurement file (.nmf) does not save window size info. Packet log and/or debug log is always

needed.

Windows XP

Check registry value of

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\TcpipParameters\TcpWindowSize.

Windows and Nemo Outdoor both use it if it exists. The value can be changed manually or by using

TcpOptimizer software. If the registry value is missing, Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size

which is 256 KB.

Windows Vista/Windows7

Windows Vista/7 does not use static window sizes from the registry. They rely on dynamic window

size which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature. However, if the same registry value that XP uses is

set, Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases, the

registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. This

registry entry can be removed.

If the TCP auto-tuning is disabled Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size 256 KB. Outdoor

5.40 and newer checks the auto-tuning state and does not change any window sizes if auto-tuning is

enabled.

How to check TCP auto-tuning state:

1. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field.

2. Type ”netsh interface tcp show global”

3. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.


Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.

4. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Right-click and

select Run as administrator.

5. To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled”. This limits the

TCP window size to 64KB. However, Outdoor sets its own default 256KB when auto-tuning is

disabled.

6. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses, type “netsh interface tcp set

global autotuning=highlyrestricted”.

7. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:

disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. Limits to 64 KB (65535).

highlyrestricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value,

very conservatively.

restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its

default value.

normal: Default value. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions.

experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not

recommended, it can degrade performance in common scenarios, only intended for research

purposes). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.

8. Windows XP fix KB943198 (http://support.microsoft.com/kb/943198) is needed when using

HSDPA category 6 or higher data transfer speeds with Nokia test terminals.

APPENDIX 10 557

APPENDIX 10

END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal

agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Anite Finland Ltd for the Anite

Finland Ltd software product(s), in whatever form, identified above ("Software Product" or "Software").

The Software Product includes computer software, the associated media, any printed materials, and

any "online" or electronic documentation. By installing, copying or otherwise using the Software

Product, you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA. If you do not agree to the terms of this

EULA, Anite Finland Ltd is unwilling to license the Software Product to you. In such event, you may

not use or copy the Software Product, and you should promptly return the unused product(s) in their

original packaging to the place of purchase within thirty days of the date of original purchase.

SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE

The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as

other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Software Product is licensed, not sold.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following rights:

Software. You agree that the Software product is licensed to you to be used with the mobile phone(s)

and software protection key designated by Anite Finland Ltd for such use ("Designated Hardware").

You also agree that you shall not have more than one copy of the Software Product in use at a time

for any Designated Hardware in which the Software Product is to be used or to be distributed except

as expressly provided for in this EULA. You may use one copy of the Software Product in binary code

form only on one computer at a time in order to conduct system measurements using the Designated

Hardware at various locations to the extent necessary for the permitted operation of the application

software but may not duplicate the Software Product.

Storage/Network/Single Use. You may also store or install a copy of the Software Product in binary

code form only over an internal network, and distribute the Software Product to your other computers

over an internal network. However, you must acquire and dedicate a license for the Software Product

for each Designated Hardware on which the Software Product is used or to which it is distributed. A

license for the Software Product may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers.

2. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS.

Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. Removal, emulation, or

reverse engineering of all or any part of this product or its protection constitutes an unauthorized

modification to the product and is specifically prohibited. Nothing in this license statement permits you

to derive the source or assembly code of files provided to you in executable or object formats.

Limitations on Modifications, Adaptations and Other Changes. You may not modify, adapt or

otherwise make any changes to the Software Product except and only to the extent you are expressly

permitted to do so under the applicable mandatory law notwithstanding this limitation or by Anite

Finland Ltd's prior written consent.

Separation of Components. The Software Product is licensed as a single product. Its component

parts may not be separated for use on more than one Designated Hardware and computer as

designated above.


Not for Resale. This Software Product is “Not for Resale" or "NFR" and your license only permits

personal use and you may not sell or otherwise transfer the Software Product for value except as

specified below.

Rental. You may not rent, lease or lend the Software Product to any person or entity.

Software Transfer. You may not otherwise give or permanently transfer any or all of your rights under

this EULA without the express prior written consent of Anite Finland Ltd which such consent shall not

be unreasonably withheld.

Duration and Termination. This EULA is effective from the day you open the sealed media package

or download and continues until termination. You may terminate this EULA at any time. Without

prejudice to any other rights, Anite Finland Ltd may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the

terms and conditions of this EULA. In either event, you must destroy all copies of the Software Product

and all associated media, printed materials, updates and component parts and verify to Anite Finland

Ltd in writing that such has been done.

3. SUPPORT SERVICES. Anite Finland Ltd may provide you with support services related to the

Software Product ("Support Services"). Any supplemental software code provided to you as part of the

Support Services shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject to the terms and

conditions of this EULA. With respect to technical information you provide to Anite Finland Ltd as part

of the Support Services, Anite Finland Ltd may use such information for its business purpose,

including for product updates and development.

4. COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS. All title and copyrights in and to the Software Product (including

but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets",

incorporated into the Software Product), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the

Software Product, are owned by Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers. The Software Product is protected

by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. You may not copy the printed materials

accompanying the Software Product. You may not remove, modify or alter any Anite Finland Ltd

copyright or trademark from any part of the Software Product, including but not limited to any such

notices contained in the physical and/or electronic media or documentation, in the Anite Finland Ltd

Setup Wizard dialogue or 'about' boxes, in any of the runtime resources and/or in any web-presence

or web-enabled notices, code or other embodiments originally contained in or dynamically or

otherwise created by the Software Product.

Portions based on WinWAP technology. Copyright Slob-Trot Software Oy Ab 2004.

http://www.winwap.com

Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) measurement technology included in this product is

protected by copyright and by European, US, and other patents and is provided under license from

OPTICOM Dipl. -Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2004, http://www.opticom.de. For further

information, please refer to http://www.pesq.org.

This software uses Libresample library distributed under LGPL license. For detailed license

information, see libresample-license.txt, gpl-license.txt and lgpl-license.txt located in the Nemo

Outdoor installation directory.

Iperf copyright

Copyright (c) 1999-2006, The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois

All Rights Reserved.

APPENDIX 10 559

Iperf performance test

Mark Gates

Ajay Tirumala

Jim Ferguson

Jon Dugan

Feng Qin

Kevin Gibbs

John Estabrook

National Laboratory for Applied Network Research

National Center for Supercomputing Applications

University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign

http://www.ncsa.uiuc.edu

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf)

and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,

including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,

and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so,

subject to the following conditions:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimers.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its contributors may be used to

endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,

OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN

THE SOFTWARE.

5. DUAL-MEDIA SOFTWARE. You may receive the Software Product in more than one medium.

Regardless of the type or size of medium you receive, you may use only that one medium that is

appropriate for the systems you use to operate the Software Product. You may not use or install the

other medium on any system. You may not loan, rent, lease or otherwise transfer the other medium to

another user, except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of the Software Product.

6. CONFIDENTIALITY AND NON-DISCLOSURE. You agree to keep in confidence and not to disclose

in any manner or form to any third party nor publish any such data or information related to the

Software Product. You agree to protect all information and data provided to you by Anite Finland Ltd

related to the Software Product with the same degree of care that you use to protect your own like

data and information, but with not less than that due care exercised by a reasonably prudent person

under the same or similar circumstances.


7. U.S. GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Product and documentation are

provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to

restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer

Software clause at DFARS 252.277-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial

Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52-227-19, as applicable.

8. LIMITED WARRANTY. Anite Finland Ltd warrants that (a) the Software Product will perform

substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of three (3) months

from the date of receipt, and (b) any third party hardware accompanying the Software Products will be

free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1)

year from the date of receipt. To the extent that implied warranties are disclaimable, they are

disclaimed in paragraph 10. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow disclaimers of or limitations on

duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation may not apply to you. Any implied warranties

on the Software Product and, as applicable, third party hardware that is not disclaimable are limited to

three (3) months and one (1) year respectively.

9. CUSTOMER REMEDIES. Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability and your exclusive

remedy shall be, at Anite Finland Ltd option, either (a) return of the price paid, or (b) repair or

replacement of the software or hardware that does not meet the Limited Warranty contained in this

EULA and which is returned to Anite Finland Ltd. The Limited Warranty contained herein is void if

failure of the software or third party hardware has resulted from accident, abuse, misapplication or

events beyond the control of Anite Finland Ltd including, but not limited to Acts of God, acts of nature

or acts of war. Any replacement Software Products or hardware will be warranted for the remainder of

the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Anite Finland Ltd is not

responsible for ensuring adequate backup and storage for your data or records.

10. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Anite Finland Ltd

disclaims all other warranties, either express or implied, including but not limited to implied warranties

of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and non-infringement of third-party rights, with

regard to the Software Product, the accompanying written materials, and any accompanying

hardware. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have others which vary from

state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.

11. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. To the maximum extent permitted by

applicable law, in no event shall Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers be liable for any damages

whatsoever (including without limitation, special, incidental, consequential, punitive or indirect

damages for personal injury, loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business

information, or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use this Software

Product, even if Anite Finland Ltd has been advised of the possibility of such damages. In any case,

Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability under any provision of this EULA shall be limited to

the amount actually paid by you for the Software Product and/or third party hardware accompanying

the Software Product. The Limitations of Liability contained in this Section apply to claims of every

kind, whether based on contract law, tort law or otherwise, even if these limitations have the effect of

exculpating a party from responsibility for its negligence, fault or other conduct. Because some

states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental

damages, the above limitation may not apply to you.

nemo outdoor 5.80 manual

Documents